PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.03 (En CKZZ5305.0086.0004)

PCS-9705 Series
Bay Control Units

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR Electric Co., Ltd. is dispatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided
to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the
recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this
manual, and read relevant chapters carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual I
Date: 2011-08-05
Preface
Instructions and Warnings
The following indicators and standard definiti ons are used:
DANGER means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur
if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to
resulting damage of the protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high -voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high
voltage generated is dangerous
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
II PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
Preface
CAUTION!
 Earthing
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
 Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the power supply to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check
the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Version: 1.03 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
P/N: EN_CKZZ5305.0086.0004 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com
Copyright © NR 20 11. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com
We reserve all rights to this document an d to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corr ections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual III
Date: 2011-08-05
Preface
IV PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface....................................................................................................I
Table of Contents ................................................................................. V
1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 1
1.1 Application .......................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Functions ............................................................................................................ 1

1.3 Features............................................................................................................... 3
2 Technical Data .................................................................................... 5
2.1 Electrical Specifications .................................................................................... 5

2.1.1 AC Current Input...................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input...................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.4 Transducer Input ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.5 Analog Output .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.6 Binary Input ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.1.7 Binary Output .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Mechanical Specifications................................................................................. 6

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range ..................................................... 7
2.4 Communication Port .......................................................................................... 7
2.4.1 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.2 Optical Fiber Port .................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.3 Clock Synchronization Port..................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................... 8

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ................................................................................................................ 8
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.5.3 Electrical Tests......................................................................................................................... 8
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual V
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................. 9
2.6 Performance........................................................................................................ 9
2.6.1 Metering Scope and Accuracy .............................................................................................. 10
2.6.2 Control Performance ............................................................................................................. 10
2.6.3 Clock Performance ................................................................................................................ 10
2.6.4 Binary Input Signal ................................................................................................................ 10
2.6.5 Information Refreshing Rate ................................................................................................. 10
2.7 Certifications..................................................................................................... 10
3 Operation Theory ............................................................................. 13
3.1 Operating Mode Management ......................................................................... 13

3.2 Analog Input...................................................................................................... 13
3.3 Digital Sampling Input...................................................................................... 13

3.4 Binary Input....................................................................................................... 13
3.5 Receiving and Sending GOOSE Variables ..................................................... 16

3.6 Binary Output.................................................................................................... 16
3.7 Records ............................................................................................................. 16
3.8 Interlocking ....................................................................................................... 16

3.9 Synchronism-check.......................................................................................... 17
3.10 Clock Management ......................................................................................... 18

3.11 Detection of Busbar VT Disconnection ........................................................ 18
3.12 Diagnostic Self-test ........................................................................................ 18
3.13 Regulation ....................................................................................................... 19
4 Supervision ...................................................................................... 21
4.1 Overview............................................................................................................ 21
4.2 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705A .......................................................................... 21

4.3 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705B .......................................................................... 27
4.4 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705C .......................................................................... 34
5 Hardware........................................................................................... 41
VI PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
5.1 Overview............................................................................................................ 41
5.2 CPU Module (NR4102) on Slot B01(Mandatory) ............................................. 45
5.3 AI(ECVT) (NR4201B) on Slot B02 (Optional)................................................... 49

5.4 AI(AC) Module (NR4402) on Slot B02 and B03(Optional) .............................. 49
5.5 NET-DSP Module (NR4136A) on slot B03 (Optional) ..................................... 55
5.6 BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504) on Slot B04~B09 .......................................... 56

5.7 GOOSE Module (NR4126) on Slot B09 (Optional).......................................... 81
5.8 AO Module (NR4411) on Slot B10(Optional) ................................................... 83

5.9 AI(DC) Module (NR4410) on Slot B10 or B11 (Optional) ................................ 85
5.10 BO(IL) Module (NR4521) on Slot B12/B13 (Optional)................................... 88
5.11 BO Module (NR4521) on Slot B14~B19 (Optional) ....................................... 92

5.12 PWR Module (NR4301) on Slot B20(Mandatory) ........................................ 102
5.13 Rear Panel Definition.................................................................................... 104
6 Settings........................................................................................... 117
6.1 Overview...........................................................................................................117
6.2 Device_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C..............................................................117
6.3 Comm_Settingsr for PCS-9705A/B/C .............................................................117

6.4 Function_Linksr for PCS-9705A/B/C............................................................. 127
6.5 GOOSE_Links for PCS-9705A/B/C ................................................................ 130

6.6 Spare_Links for PCS-9705A........................................................................... 130
6.7 System_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C............................................................ 130
6.8 AR_Settings for PCS-9705A........................................................................... 139

6.9 Syn_Settings for PCS-9705A ......................................................................... 139
6.10 Syn_Settings1 and Syn_Settings2 for PCS-9705C .................................... 145

6.11 BI_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C ................................................................... 147
6.12 Control_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C.......................................................... 148
6.13 TP_Settings for PCS-9705A ......................................................................... 149

6.14 Regulation_Settings for PCS-9705B ........................................................... 152
6.15 Interlock_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C........................................................ 153
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual VII
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
6.16 Transducer_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C ................................................... 155

6.17 AC_Calbr_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C ...................................................... 156
6.18 DC_Calbr_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C ...................................................... 156
7 Human Machine Interface ..............................................................157
7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 157

7.1.1 Design ................................................................................................................................. 157
7.1.2 Functionality ........................................................................................................................ 157
7.1.3 Knob Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 158
7.1.4 LED indicatiors .................................................................................................................... 158
7.2 Understand the LCD Display ......................................................................... 159

7.2.1 Normal Display .................................................................................................................... 159
7.2.2 Alarm Display ...................................................................................................................... 159
7.3 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ..................................................................... 160

7.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 160
7.3.2 Analog.................................................................................................................................. 163
7.3.3 Status................................................................................................................................... 187
7.3.4 Records ............................................................................................................................... 189
7.3.5 Settings................................................................................................................................ 192
7.3.6 Local_Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 192
7.3.7 Information........................................................................................................................... 193
7.3.8 Test ...................................................................................................................................... 194
7.3.9 Clock.................................................................................................................................... 196
7.3.10 Language........................................................................................................................... 196
8 Communication .............................................................................. 199
8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 199

8.2 Ethernet Port Information .............................................................................. 199
8.2.1 IP Address and Equipment Address of the Equipment....................................................... 199
8.2.2 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable .................................................................... 199
VIII PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
8.2.3 Connections and Toplogies ................................................................................................. 200
8.3 SCADA Communication................................................................................. 200

8.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 200
8.3.2 SCADA Common Functionality ........................................................................................... 200
8.3.3 Behavior and Specific Treatments ...................................................................................... 200
8.3.4 Data Sent to SCADA ........................................................................................................... 201
8.3.5 Data Sent to this Device ...................................................................................................... 202
8.4 IEC61850 Interface.......................................................................................... 202

8.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 202
8.4.2 Communication Profiles ...................................................................................................... 203
8.4.3 Server Data Organization .................................................................................................... 203
8.4.4 Server Features and Configuration ..................................................................................... 207
8.4.5 ACSI Conformance.............................................................................................................. 209
8.4.6 Logical Nodes Table ............................................................................................................ 213
8.5 DNP3.0 Interface ............................................................................................. 216

8.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 216
8.5.2 Link Layer Functions ........................................................................................................... 216
8.5.3 Transport Functions............................................................................................................. 216
8.5.4 Application Layer Functions ................................................................................................ 216
9 Installation ...................................................................................... 221
9.1 General ............................................................................................................ 221
9.2 Safety Instructions ......................................................................................... 221

9.3 Checking the Shipment.................................................................................. 222
9.4 Material and Tools Required.......................................................................... 222

9.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions.................................................... 222
9.6 Mechanical Installation .................................................................................. 223
9.7 Electrial Installation and Wiring .................................................................... 224

9.7.1 Grounding Guidelines ......................................................................................................... 224
9.7.2 Cubicle Grounding............................................................................................................... 224
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual IX
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
9.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................... 225
9.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation................................................................................ 226
9.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring ........................................................................................................... 226
10 Commissioning ............................................................................ 229
10.1 General .......................................................................................................... 229

10.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 229
10.3 Commission Tools........................................................................................ 230

10.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................. 230
10.5 Product Checks ............................................................................................ 230

10.5.1 Check Version ................................................................................................................... 231
10.5.2 Checking the Analog input ................................................................................................ 231
10.5.3 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs .................................................................................... 232
10.5.4 Checking the Output Relays ............................................................................................. 232
10.5.5 Testing the Communication with SCADA.......................................................................... 232
10.5.6 Checking the Synchronism CB Closing ............................................................................ 232
10.5.7 Interlocking Function Check (if used)................................................................................ 232
10.5.8 Checking the Adjustment of Transformer Tap Position ..................................................... 232
10.5.9 Checking Clock ................................................................................................................. 232
10.5.10 Clock Synchronization Checking .................................................................................... 232
10.5.11 Power-fail Checking......................................................................................................... 232
10.5.12 Switching from Local to Remote Control ........................................................................ 232
10.5.13 Final ................................................................................................................................. 233
11 Maintenance ................................................................................. 235
11.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................. 235
11.2 Appearance and Wiring Check .................................................................... 235

11.2.1 Appearance Test ................................................................................................................ 235
11.2.2 Wiring Test ......................................................................................................................... 235
11.2.3 Jumper Check.................................................................................................................... 235
X PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
11.3 Input/Output Check ...................................................................................... 235

11.3.1 Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 236
11.3.2 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 236
11.3.3 Binary Output ..................................................................................................................... 236
11.3.4 Analog Inputs ..................................................................................................................... 236
11.3.5 Function Check.................................................................................................................. 236
11.4 Method of Repair .......................................................................................... 236

11.4.1 Replacing the Complete Device ........................................................................................ 236
11.4.2 Replacing a Board ............................................................................................................. 237
11.5 Cleaning ........................................................................................................ 238
11.6 Storage .......................................................................................................... 238
12 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................. 239
12.1 Decomissioning ............................................................................................ 239

12.1.1 Switching Off ..................................................................................................................... 239
12.1.2 Disconnecting Cables ....................................................................................................... 239
12.1.3 Dismantling........................................................................................................................ 239
12.2 Disposal......................................................................................................... 239
13 Manual Version History................................................................ 241
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual XI
Date: 2011-08-05
Table of Contents
XII PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-9705 series bay control units (abbreviated BCUs) are mainly applied to measurement and
control of data and signals for bay level of substation. They are object-orientedly designed under
the same hardware and software platform.
Typical application of PCS-9705 series BCUs in SAS is shown in the following figure.
GPS Antenna
Digital Relays
Remote Monitoring
System(DRRMS)
PCS-9700 HMI System IEC60870-5-101,
Anti -maloperation IEC60870-5-104,
DNP 3.0, etc. IEC 60870-5-103
Operator Engineer Workstation
Server A Server B
运
报警
行
主 GPS 时钟同步装
同
从置
RCS-9798A/ B
取消
秒脉冲
步
Workstation Workstation RCS-9698G/H

分脉冲
(Optional ) Printer
Station Level RTU
Protection Management Unit
(Optional ) RCS-9785C/ D
Clock
Synchronization
Unit
PCS-9881/PCS-9882
Station Bus: MMS , GOOSE( Interlocking),SNTP
Ethernet Switch
PCS-9000 Series IEEE 1588

PCS-900 Series PCS-9705
Relay Protection Relay Protection BCU RCS-9794A/ B
Bay Level Protocol Converter
Third-Party IED,
Energy meters, DFR, etc
PCS-9881/PCS-9882
Ethernet Switch Process Bus: SV, GOOSE Tripping/ Binary Input, GMRP IEEE 1588
PCS-221 PCS-222 PCS-221 PCS-222
Merging Unit Intelligent Interposing Relay Set Merging Unit Intelligent Interposing Relay Set
Process Level
Optical Fiber Optical Fiber
PCS-9250 Series PCS-9250 Series Circuit Breaker

ECT/ EVT
Circuit Breaker
ECT/ EVT
Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-9705 series BCUs in SAS
1.2 Functions
PCS-9705 series BCUs have an object oriented design, i.e., the user can find a proper sub-type of
bay control unit for an object inside the substation to be monitored and/or controlled. To achieve
this goal, some sub-type bay control units with different functions and/or different configurations
are founded under the same hardware and software platform; the following tables present the
details:
Table 1.2-1 Maximum configuration of PCS-9705
Device models
PCS-9705A PCS-9705B PCS-9705C
Module types
Conventional sampling method:

5VT/4CT 13VT 8VT/7CT
AC analog inputs
IEC60044-8 digital sampling method Optional
IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling method Optional
DC analog inputs 8 or 16 8 or 16 8 or 16
PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual 1
Date: 2011-08-05
1 Introduction
Device models
PCS-9705A PCS-9705B PCS-9705C
Module types
DC analog outputs 0 4 0
6 fixed + 114 configurable (common negative supply)

Binary inputs
(Not compatible with GOOSE mode)
26 normal open binary outputs in 3 BO modules

Binary outputs Or :
52 normal open binary outputs in 6 BO modules
Synchronism 1 0 2
Interlocking criteria status output Optional

contacts Up to 22 binary outputs(NO) in 2 BO modules for interlock logic
GOOSE functions Optional Optional Optional
Note! Only one of the 3 optional sampling methods can be chosen at one time:
1) Conventional sampling method via AI(AC) module(e.g.:NR4402) equipped in slot B02 and slot
B03.
2) IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module(e.g.:NR4201B).
3) IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A).
Note! GOOSE function can be realized by slot B03 NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A) or
slot B09 GOOSE module(e.g.:NR4126A or NR4126C).
Note! 120 binary inputs are not compatible with GOOSE mode. When GOOSE module is
chosen, PCS-9705 can only support up to 100 binary inputs.
Table 1.2-2 Application of the PCS-9705
Device Type Application
Circuit breaker.
PCS-9705A Each side of Transformer.
Tap position acquisition/regulation of transformers
Common signals in the substation

PCS-9705B
Busbar.
Measurement and control of the middle/side circuit breakers of the

circuit in 1½ CB arrangement.
PCS-9705C
Double branches for the low-voltage side of the main transformer
0.4kV substation-use transformer
Graphical representation of an electric single line diagram (abbreviated SLD) is supplied to be

shown on the LCD display of PCS-9700 series BCUs.
2 PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual
Date: 2011-08-05
1 Introduction
1.3 Features
 The devices make use of a fully-closed chassis with a complete panel, have completely
separated spaces for electronic and electrical systems. The traditional motherboard wiring
mode is cancelled. At the same time, its software features corresponding anti-interference
measures which enhance their anti-interference capacity; and their electromagnetic radiation
also satisfy relevant standards.
 PCS-9705 series BCUs make use of new PowerPC hardware platform, 16 bits parallel A/D
converter, 320*240 graphic dot matrix LCD, and real time multi-task operating system for
industrial purpose so as to realize high-capacity, high-precision, fast, real time information
processing. With high-precision parallel A/D converter, synchronization sampling can be
conducted for all the AC signals to ensure the accuracy of analog quantity measurement
which is up to the 15th harmonic component.
 Software and hardware clock synchronization are both adopted with 1ms timing accuracy to
ensure the resolution of Sequence Of Events (abbreviated SOE).
 Large scale LCD provides graph and text HMI which makes operation convenient.
 The devices are equipped with duplex Ethernet with 100M optical fiber or twisted pair cable.
 The devices make use of back plug-in module structure. Electrical and electronic circuits are
strictly separated, which enhances EMC immunity performance.
 Low power consumption and wide ambient temperature range.
 PCS-9705 series BCUs support IEC61850, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP 3.0 protocols. Please
refer to the Chapter “Communication”for more details of these communication protocols.
Date: 2011-08-05
1 Introduction
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 AC Current Input
Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~2In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 2In
-for 10s 12In
-for 1s 30In
-for half a cycle 75In
Burden < 0.2VA/phase @In < 0.4VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.2%In
2.1.2 AC Voltage Input
Phase rotation ABC

Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~130V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 130V
-10s 200V
-1s 250V
Burden at rated < 0.10VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.2%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated Voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc
Operating Range 80%~120% of rated voltage
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Conventional substation <20W

(Quiescent condition)
Conventional substation <25W
(Operating condition)
Digital substation <25W
(Quiescent condition)
Digital substation <30W
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
(Operating condition)
2.1.4 Transducer Input

Input range 0-20mA 0-10V 0-250V
Input resistance 235Ω 8.8kΩ 248kΩ
Accuracy 0.5 class 0.5 class 0.5 class
2.1.5 Analog Output

Input range 0-20mA 0-10V
Burden <500Ω <5mA
Accuracy 0.5 class 0.5 class
Dielectric tests 2000Vac 2000Vac
Max response time 20ms 20ms
2.1.6 Binary Input

Rated Voltage 24V 48V 110V 125V 220V 250V
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
Pickup voltage 55%~70% of rated voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 120% of rated voltage
Withstand voltage
2000Vac, 2800Vdc
-continuously
Response time for logic input <1ms
2.1.7 Binary Output

Item Signal output
Output mode Potential-free contact Potential-free contact

Max system voltage 380 Vac, 250Vdc 380Vac, 250Vdc
Voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1200V RMS for 1min
5 .0A @ 380Vac 8.0A @ 380Vac
Continuous carry
5 .0A @ 250Vdc 8.0A @ 250Vdc
6 A@3s 10 A@3s
Short duration current
15 A@0.5s 20 A@0.5s
0.6A@48Vdc 0.7A@48Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.1A@110Vdc 0.3A@110Vdc
0.05A@220Vdc 0.2A@220Vdc
Burden 30 0mW 240mW
Pickup time < 8ms (typical 3ms) < 10ms
Dropout time < 5ms < 8ms
Bounce time 1ms 1ms
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
Enclosure dimensions (W×H×D) 482.6mm ×177.0mm×230.2mm

Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning dimensions (W×H) 450.0mm×179.0mm, M6 screw
Chassis color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 8kg
Chassis material Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP40, up to IP51(With cover)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree 2
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 Ethernet Port
Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Transmission distance <100m
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2.4.2 Optical Fiber Port

2.4.2.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST, SC
Fiber type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
Margin Min. +3.0dB
2.4.2.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min. +3.0dB
2.4.2.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 820nm
Margin Min. +3.0dB
2.4.3 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Transmission distance <500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests
Vibration IEC 60255-21 -1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21 -2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance measurements Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22 -1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22 -3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22 -4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22 -5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22 -6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Performance
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
2.6.1 Metering Scope and Accuracy

Item Range Accuracy
Current 0.02 ~ 2×In ≤ 0.2% In
Voltage 0.02 ~ 1.2×Un ≤ 0.2% Un
≤0.5% of reading at unity power
Active Power (W) 0.02 ~ 1.2×Un, 0.02 ~ 2×In
factor
≤0.5% of reading at zero power
Reactive Power (var) 0.02 ~ 1.2×Un, 0.02 ~ 2×In
factor
Phase Angle 0°~ 360° ≤ 0.5% or ±1°
90% ～110%fn
Frequency ≤0.01Hz
fn=50Hz or 60Hz
Harmonics 15th
2.6.2 Control Performance
Control mode Local or remote

Accuracy of local control ≤ 1s
Accuracy of remote control ≤ 3s
2.6.3 Clock Performance

Real time clock accuracy ≤ 3 seconds/day
Accuracy of GPS synchronization ≤ 1ms
External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, IEEE1588, SNTP protocol etc.
2.6.4 Binary Input Signal

Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms
Binary input mode Potential-free contact
Resolution of SOE ≤ 1ms
2.6.5 Information Refreshing Rate

Refreshing Cycle of Measurements ≤ 1s
Refreshing Cycle of Digital Signals ≤ 1s
2.7 Certifications
 ISO9001:2000
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:1999
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L4
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
 Products safety (PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Technical Data
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Operating Mode Management

 Operation mode: When the equipment is operating normally, this device is in the operation
mode. The “ALARM”LED on the front panel of this device is off. The “HEALTHY”LED on the
front panel of this device is lit on as green.
 Maintenance mode: If the corresponding isolator link is closed, the binary input 1(i.e.
[BI_Maintenance]) will be set as “1”, now this device is in the maintenance mode. The
“ALARM”LED on the front panel of this device is off. The “HEALTHY”LED on the front panel
of this device is lit on as green.
For the details about the maintenance mode, please refer to the Section “Operation
Theory”->“Binary Input”.
 Fault mode: When this device has detected a major self-check failure or after a parameter
modification, this device is in the fault mode. The “ALARM”LED on the front panel of this
device will be lit on as yellow. The “HEALTHY”LED on the front panel of this device will be off.
The execution of binary output is blocked, but the analog values and binary inputs can also be
sent to SCADA/RTU.
3.2 Analog Input

Acquisition of voltage or current DC signals is done via AI(DC) board.
Acquisition of AC voltage and current coming from the electrical network is done via AI(AC) board.
3.3 Digital Sampling Input
Note! Only one of the 3 optional sampling methods can be chosen at one time:
1) Conventional sampling method via AI(AC) module(e.g.:NR4402) equipped in slot B02 and slot
B03.
2) IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module(e.g.:NR4201B).
3) IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A).
3.4 Binary Input

Binary input is used for the signaling of switching positions. With a free contact way, all binary
inputs are optically isolated to remove all external disturbances and can also be free configured.
Two methods of binary input signal handling is designed. One is a filtering circuit and the other is
via a well-designed debouncing technique to avoid any hazardous behavior (multiple state
changes during a given duration) as shown in the following figure. The start transition is signaled
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
with the correct time, the following changes within the debounce time are ignored. The debouncing
time can be set with a range of 0~60000ms. The event is time tagged at the instant of the first
transition. This device checks the state of binary input every 0.625 millisecond.
Figure 3.4-1 Debouncing technique
There are two types of binary input: physical binary input which indicates the apparatus switching
position and virtual binary input. The state of the physical binary input can be displayed in the
menu “Status”and can be sent to SCADA/RTU as states or as changes of state depending on the
protocol. The binary input can be written into the SOE record.
Some of the first 5 binary inputs on BI module on slot B04 are used for specific usages. These
binary inputs are called as Special Purpose Binary Input:
 Binary input 1:
The binary input 1(i.e.:[BI_Maintenance]) can only be energized locally by closing the
corresponding isolator link, and this device will show corresponding prompt message via LCD
display to remind the operator that this device is in the maintenance mode when it is
energized.
“1”: This device is in the maintenance mode;
“0”: This device is not in the maintenance mode.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for IEC103 protocol is to block
communication between this device and SCADA (I.e.: HMI system) or remote terminal unit
(RTU).
Please refer to the “GOOSE Function Manual”for the application of [BI_Maintenance] for
IEC61850 protocol.
 Binary input 2:
The binary input 2(i.e.: [BI_Block_Dis]) is used for releasing the interlocking function of this
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
device. When [BI_Block_Dis] is set as “1”, the interlocking function of the device will be
disabled.
 Binary input 3:
It is used for enabling the telecontrol ([BI_Rmt/Loc]). When [BI_Rmt/Loc] is set as

“1”(Remote),all the binary outputs can only be remotely controlled by SCADA or control
centers. When it is set as “0”(Local), all the binary outputs can only be manually, locally and
directly device operated to trip, close output or for signaling purpose.
Note! The following 2 special purpose binary inputs are inapplicable to PCS-9705B.
 Binary input 4:
For PCS-9705A, Binary input 4 is named as [BI_Manual_Synchro].
If the [BI_Rmt/Loc] is “0”, i.e. this device works in Local Control Mode, when the
[BI_Manual_Synchro] is “1”, the function of synchronism-check for circuit breaker
(abbreviated CB) closing is started.
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the CB is closed by manual control.
For PCS-9705B, Binary input 4 is named as [BI_Spare1], and it is applied as the 1st reserved
binary input for possible special purpose in the future.
For PCS-9705C, Binary input 4 is named as [BI_Manual_Synchro1].
[BI_Manual_Synchro1] is “1”, the function of synchronism-check for closing the 1st CB is
started.
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the 1st CB wiil be closed by manual control.
 Binary input 5:
For PCS-9705A, Binary input 5 is named as [BI_Spare1], and it is applied as the 1st reserved
For PCS-9705B, Binary input 5 is named as [BI_Spare2], and it is applied as the 2nd
reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the future.
For PCS-9705C, Binary input 5 is named as [BI_Manual_Synchro2].
[BI_Manual_Synchro2] is “1”, the function of synchronism-check for closing the 2nd CB is
started.
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the 2nd CB wiil be closed by manual control.
 Binary input 6:
For PCS-9705A, Binary input 6 is named as [BI_Spare2], and it is applied as the 2nd
reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the future. The 1st tap position binary
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
input can be connected to this terminal.
For PCS-9705B, Binary input 6 is named as [BI_Spare3], and it is applied as the 3rd reserved
For PCS-9705C, Binary input 6 is named as [BI_Spare1], and it is applied as the 1st reserved
3.5 Receiving and Sending GOOSE Variables

The GOOSE module receives signals from outer devices by GOOSE and forwards them to the
SCADA system. It also sends the GOOSE variables to the interposing set in the process level
according to the telecontrol commands sent by the SCADA system.
3.6 Binary Output

Binary output is used to trip or close primary apparatus, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors
and earthing switches within a bay, or for any signaling purpose. Permission to operate is given
after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism-check,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings. The execution of binary output is
severe according to the principle of Select-Before-Execute to ensure high reliability. In addition,
with hardware self-check function this device will block binary output once a hardware fault is
detected to prevent misoperation result from hardware fault. As all the binary outputs are potential
free contacts, they are available for free configuration.
3.7 Records
Please refer to the Section “Human-Machine Interface”->“Understand the HMI Menu Tree”
->“Records”for more details.
3.8 Interlocking
Before a switching command, output is executed, the interlocking logic of this device will check
whether the preprogrammed interlocking logic equations are met to permit the operation or not.
The logic interlocking function is enabled by setting the parameter [En_Trpn_Blk] and/or
[En_Clsn_Blk] to “1”. Interlocking logic equations can be configured straight forwardly upon the
devices to meet the customer’ s specific requirements via adding configurable logic by the
interlocking configuration tool with a user-friendly interface.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and apparatus position status at
any given time.
If the setting [En_Hardware_Blk] is set as “1”, hardware interlocking is enabled. This function is
based on software interlocking logic function and provides one more output contact for every
remotely-controlled apparatus as user purpose which is built in the BO(IL) module(i.e. interlocking
module). When executing a switching command output, if the interlocking logic conditions are met,
besides internal software interlocking corresponds remote trip or remote closing contact, this
device also provides an additional normal open contact for the remotely-controlled apparatus via
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
BO(IL) module.
3.9 Synchronism-check
Note! This function is inapplicable to PCS-9705B. The menu “Synchrocheck” for
synchronism settings is not applied in PCS-9705B.
This feature only aims at remote closing 1 if this device has 1 group of synchronism-check for CB
closing (only appropriate for PCS-9705A) or aimed at remote closing 1 and 2 if this device (only
appropriate for PCS-9705C) has 2 groups of synchronism-check for CB closing.
The BCU synchronism-check function is designed to check whether the voltages with respect to
phase angle, frequency and magnitude on both sides of the CB are in synchronism to ensure that
CB closing can be done safely.
3 configurable synchronism-check modes are designed: No check mode, Dead check mode and
Synchronism-check mode.
Two groups of settings about synchronism -check are configured in PCS-9705:
1) Some parameters about synchronism-check in the “Function_Links”submenu of the

menu “Settings”of PCS-9705.
2) All the parameters in the “Syn_Settings”menu of the “Settings”submenu of the menu

“Settings”of PCS-9705.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings” for the function links and synchronism settings of
PCS-9705A and PCS-9705C.
Note! 4 remote control commands are optional: Normal telecontrol, No check mode,
Dead check mode and Synchronism-check mode.
Take PCS-9705A for example to introduce synchronism-check of PCS-9705 as below.

PCS-9705C is similar.
When Binary input 3 ([BI_Rmt/Loc ]) is set as “1”, if the remote control command adopts “No
check mode”, “Dead check mode” or “Synchronism-check mode”, the settings
[Link_DeadChk] and [Link_SynChk] in the menu “Function_Links”will be invalid. Whether “No
check mode”, “Dead check mode”or “Synchronism-check mode”will take effect is determined
by the remote control command from SCADA.
When Binary input 3 ([BI_Rmt/Loc]) is set as “1”, if the remote control command adopts “Normal
remote control”, and then whether “No check mode”, “Dead check mode” or
“Synchronism-check mode”will take effect is determined by the settings [Link_DeadChk] and
[Link_SynChk] in the menu “Function_Links”of PCS-9705.
When Binary input 3 ([BI_Rmt/Loc]) is set as “0”, whether “No check mode ”, “Dead check
mode” or “Synchronism-check mode” will take effect is determined by the settings
[Link_DeadChk] and [Link_SynChk] in the menu “Function_Links”of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
When this device is set to work in No check mode and receives a closing command, the CB will be
closed without synchronism-check and dead check.
When this device is set to work in Synchronism-check mode, synchronism-check criteria must be
met to close CB. From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check whether
the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in dead check can meet the
synchronism-check criteria. If the synchronism-check criteria are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk],
after [t_Reset_SynChk], this device will not check the synchronism-check criteria any longer, the
failure of synchronism-check will be confirmed and an alarm signal [Alm_SynChkFail] will be
issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
If the synchronism-check criteria are met during the time [t_Reset_SynChk], the CB will be
closed.
When this device is set to work in Dead check mode, dead check criteria must be met to close CB.
Dead check mode is determined by the setting [Opt_Mode_DeadChk]. From receiving a closing
command, this device will continuously check whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and
reference voltage) involved in dead check can meet the dead check criteria. If the dead check
criteria are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk], after [t_Reset_SynChk], this device will not check the
dead check criteria any longer, the failure of dead check will be confirmed and an alarm signal
[Alm_SynChkFail] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
If the dead check criteria are met during the time [t_Reset_SynChk], the CB will be closed.
Manual closing as well as remote closing can be checked by the function with the same settings.
3.10 Clock Management

 Real time clock: The CPU module of PCS-9705 has a real time clock with high precision.
 Clock synchronization: PCS-9705 can realize clock synchronization through timing message
sent by the monitoring system. It can also realize synchronization of the device’
s clock and
the standard time by receiving IRIG-B or PPS signals from an external timing device(e.g.:
RCS-9785C or RCS-9785D).
 Supporting SNTP clock synchronization.
3.11 Detection of Busbar VT Disconnection

Please refer to the Chapter “Supervision”for the details of [Alm_VTS].
Note! The alarm signal [Alm_VTS] is not provided in PCS-9705B.
3.12 Diagnostic Self-test

When the CPU has detected any hardware fault of the device itself, an alarm event is generated
and displayed on BCU LCD. The LED HEALTHY on front panel is off and LED ALARM is lit on.
The alarm signal can also be sent to SCADA. During this time, a normal open contact is closed to
issue an alarm signal to indicate a device fault via terminals 1-2 on PWR module. Here, all the
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
binary outputs are blocked.
The hardware faults include the faults of RAM,E 2PROM, and binary output circuits.
The LED HEALTHY can not be lit on again automatically after a fault clearing . The device needs to
be reset or powered on manually.
3.13 Regulation
If AO module is equipped in slot B10, PCS-9705B can receive regulation messages from local
SCADA system or remote control centers, and then send DC voltage/current output to DCS
system to regulate the active power output of the specified generator.
User can also simulate regulation by operating on the menu of this device, i.e.: to operate on the
menu of PCS-9705B to send DC voltage/current output to DCS system.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details about the regulation function.
Note! When AO module is equipped in slot B10 and [Opt_Type_ReguX] (X=1,2,3,4) is set
as “0”(i.e.:corresponding DC analog output type is “4～20mA”), if corresponding output

current circuit of AO module is open, an alarm signal named as [Alm_DC_IoutX] will be
produced to issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA.
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Operation Theory
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
Alarm signals are displayed in the submenu “Status”->“Superv_State”.
Please refer to the “GOOSE Function Manual”for the application of GOOSE alarm signals for
details.
4.2 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705A

Alarm signals of PCS-9705A are introduced in the following table.
Table 4.2-1 Virtual binary inputs of PCS-9705A
No. Signal Description
Up to 2 modules can be equipped in this device to realize clock

synchronization function:
1) CPU module(e.g.:NR4102C, NR4102D, NR4102J or NR4102K)
equipped in slot B01.
2) NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A) equipped in slot B03.
The clock synchronization method of this device will only be determined
by the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] in any of these 2 cases:
1) slot B03 is not equipped with NET-DSP module.
2) slot B03 is equipped with NET-DSP module, but
[En_GPSSynSample_B03] is set as “0”
.
[Opt_TimeSyn] should be configured as shown in the following table.
[Opt_TimeSyn] Function
Adopt pulse per second (PPS) clock

1 Alm_TimeSyn
synchronization via RS-485 differential
level via slot B01 CPU module.
If [Alm_TimeSyn_B03]=1, or
“0”：
[En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
PPS(RS-485)
is not equipped with NET-DSP module,
when abnormality occurs in PPS(RS-485)
synchronization, [Alm_TimeSyn] will be
Adopt IRIG-B clock synchronization via

RS-485 differential level via slot B01 CPU
“1”： module.
IRIG-B(RS-485) If [Alm_TimeSyn_B03]=1, or
[En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
when abnormality occurs in

IRIG-B(RS-485) synchronization,
[Alm_TimeSyn] will be issued and it can
be sent to SCADA.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings” for more details about

[Opt_TimeSyn], [Opt_TimeSyn_B03] and [ En_GPSSynSample_B03].
2 Alm_VTS VT circuit failure alarm.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details about the settings
[U0_Alm_ROV], [En_Alm_ROV], [U1n_VT_U0] and [U2n_VT_U0].
[U0_Alm_ROV] in the menu “Settings”->“System_Settings” is
expressed as a percentage.
If the [En_Alm_ROV] is enabled and the primary 3U0 voltage input (i.e.:
[3U0Ext_Pri] displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”in PCS-9705A) is higher
than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more than 10s, and then
[Alm_ROV] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
3 Alm_ROV
When [3U0Ext_Pri] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more
than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV] will disappear.
If the [En_Alm_ROV] is enabled and the secondary 3U0 voltage input
(i.e.: [3U0Ext_Sec] displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values” in PCS-9705A) is
higher than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for more than 10s, and then
[Alm_ROV] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
When [3U0Ext_Sec] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
more than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV] will disappear.
Only one of the 3 optional sampling methods can be chosen at one time:
1) Conventional sampling method via AI(AC) module(e.g.:NR4402)
equipped in slot B02 and slot B03.
2) IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT)
module(e.g.:NR4201B).
3) IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP
module(e.g.:NR4136A).
In conventional sampling method, this alarm signal is ineffective and will
4 Alm_SmplCh
not be issued.
In IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module, if
any of the following events occurs, this alarm signal will be produced to
issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA:
1) The optical fiber linked to AI(ECVT) module is pulled out.
2) The AI(ECVT) module can not receive any data.
In IEC61850-9 -2 digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module, if
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

1) The optical fiber linked to NET-DSP module is pulled out.
2) The NET-DSP module can not receive any data.
If the PwrSuperv_1 terminal of the NR4501 BI module on slot B04 is not
5 Alm_Pwr_BI_B04 connected to positive pole of binary input auxiliary power, this alarm signal
will be produced to issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA.
If the PwrSuperv_5 terminal of the BI module(NR4501 or NR4504) on slot

B08 is not connected to positive pole of binary input auxiliary power, this
9 Alm_Pwr_BI_B08
alarm signal will be produced to issue an alarm and it can be sent to
SCADA.

10 Alm_Pwr_BI_B09
SCADA.
If any error is detected in the interlocking configuration files stored in this

11 Alm_InterlockFile
device, this alarm signal will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
12 GAlm_ADisc_SL_XX
13 GAlm_ADisc_B03_PL_XX
14 GAlm_BDisc_B03_PL_XX
15 GAlm_AStorm_B03_PL
XX=01,02… 16.
16 GAlm_BStorm_B03_PL
Please refer to the “PCS-9611 and PCS-9705 GOOSE Function
17 GAlm_General_B03
Instruction Manual”for the application of GOOSE alarm signals for
18 GAlm_ADisc_B09_PL_XX details.
22 GAlm_General_B09
If some frames are lost in SV message received by this device through the
23 SVAlm_FrameLoss_X SV receiving link X(X=1,2,3,4), this alarm signal will be issued and it can
be sent to SCADA.
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
Note! This alarm signal will only be effective when slot B03
NET-DSP module is equipped and IEC61850-9-2 digital

sampling is applied.

.
In any of the above 2 cases, [Alm_TimeSyn_B03] will be issued and it
can be sent to SCADA.
If slot B03 is equipped with NET-DSP module and the setting

[En_GPSSynSample_B03] is set as “1”, the clock synchronization
method of this device will only be determined by [Opt_TimeSyn_B03].
[Opt_TimeSyn_B03] should be configured as shown in the following

table.
24 Alm_TimeSyn_B03
[Opt_TimeSyn_B03] Function
Adopt IEEE1588 clock synchronization via

slot B03 NET-DSP module.
“1”：
If abnormality occurs in IEEE1588 clock
IEEE1588
synchronization, [Alm_TimeSyn_B03] will
be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
Adopt ulse per second (abbreviated PPS)

clock synchronization via the fiber optic port
“2”： on slot B03 NET-DSP module.
PPS(Fiber optic) If abnormality occurs in PPS(Fiber optic)
clock synchronization, [Alm_TimeSyn_B03]
will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
Adopt IRIG-B clock synchronization via the

fiber optic port on slot B03 NET-DSP
“3”：
module.
IRIG-B(Fiber optic)
If abnormality occurs in IRIG-B(Fiber optic)
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

If no valid SV message is
received via the SV receiving
link X(X=1,2,3,4). of SV
25 SVAlm_NetA_X
network A, this alarm signal
will be issued and it can be
sent to SCADA.
Note! These alarm signals will

received via the SV receiving only be effective when slot
link X(X=1,2,3,4) of SV B0 3 NET-DSP module is
26 SVAlm_NetB_X
network B, this alarm signal equipped and IEC61850-9-2
will be issued and it can be digital sampling is applied.
sent to SCADA.
If any error is detected in the

SV configuration files, this
27 SVAlm_ConfigFile
alarm signal will be issued
and it can be sent to SCADA.
When this device is set to work in Synchronism-check mode,

synchronism-check criteria must be met to close CB. From receiving a
closing command, this device will continuously check whether the 2
voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in dead check
can meet the synchronism-check criteria. If the synchronism-check
28 Alm_SynChkFail
criteria are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk], after [t_Reset_SynChk], this
device will not check the synchronism-check criteria any longer, the failure
of synchronism-check will be confirmed and an alarm signal
If the synchronism-check criteria are met during the time
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
[t_Reset_SynChk], [Sig_Ok_SynChk] will be issued and the CB will be

closed.
When this device is set to work in Dead check mode, dead check criteria
must be met to close CB. Dead check mode is determined by the setting
[Opt_Mode_DeadChk]. From receiving a closing command, this device
29 Sig_Ok_SynChk
will continuously check whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and
reference voltage) involved in dead check can meet the dead check
criteria. If the dead check criteria are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk], after
[t_Reset_SynChk], this device will not check the dead check criteria any
longer, the failure of dead check will be confirmed and an alarm signal
If the dead check criteria are met during the time [t_Reset_SynChk],
[Sig_Ok_DeadChk] will be issued and the CB will be closed.
[Alm_SynChkFail] will disappear automatically 1s after it was issued.
[Sig_Ok_SynChk] will remain as “1”as long as the synchronism-check

30 Sig_Ok_DeadChk
criteria are met.
[Sig_Ok_DeadChk] will remain as “1”as long as the dead check criteria

are met.
Note! For [Alm_Pwr_BI_BXX] in the above table, BXX=B04,B05,B06,B07,B08.B09. The
actual value of XX will differ according to the number of BI module in this device. (i.e.: If
only 3 BI modules are configured, [Alm_Pwr_BI_B04], [Alm_Pwr_BI_B05] and
[Alm_Pwr_BI_B06] will be displayed in the submenu “Status”->“Superv_State”, but
[Alm_Pwr_BI_B07],[Alm_Pwr_BI_B08],[Alm_Pwr_BI_B09] will be hidden).
Note! In the above table, [Alm_VTS] can be generated with a delay of 2.5s when meeting
any of the following events:
1) Busbar negative phase sequence (NPS) secondary voltage is in excess of 8V or
2) Any phase sequence secondary voltage is less than 30V with the presence of any phase
currents (I.e., the secondary value of anyone of the phase A/B/C current is in excess of
0.06In).
Where:
In: Secondary rated current.
If any of these 2 conditions is met and lasts for 2.5s, an alarm signal named [Alm_VTS] will
be issued. If both of these 2 conditions are not met for 10s, [Alm_VTS] will disappear.
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
[Alm_VTS] can be locally displayed on LCD and sent to SCADA.
4.3 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705B

Alarm signals of PCS-9705B (excluding GOOSE alarm signals) are introduced in the following
table.
Table 4.3-1 Virtual binary inputs of PCS-9705B

.

“0”：
1 Alm_TimeSyn [En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
PPS(RS-485)

module.
“1”： [En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
IRIG-B(RS-485) is not equipped with NET-DSP module,
be sent to SCADA.

Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
[U0_Alm_ROV], [U1n_VT_U0] and [U2n_VT_U0].
If the primary 3U0 voltage input (i.e.: [3U0Ext_Pri] displayed in the
submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2” in
PCS-9705B) is higher than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more than
10s, and then [Alm_ROV1] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
2 Alm_ROV1
When [3U0Ext_Pri] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more
than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV1] will disappear.
If the secondary 3U0 voltage input (i.e.: [3U0Ext_Sec] displayed in the
submenu “Analog”->“Measurements ”->“Secondary_Values2” in
more than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV1] will disappear.
[U0_Alm_ROV], [En_VT4_U0], [U1n_VT_U0] and [U2n_VT_U0].
If [En_VT4_U0] is disabled, i.e.: the 4th group voltage inputs (Pin
19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n” on AI(AC) module) is disabled to receive.3
external zero sequence voltage inputs, [Alm_ROV2] will not be issued.
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled, i.e.:the 4th group voltage inputs (Pin
19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n” on AI(AC) module) is enabled to receive.3
external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Ua_Pri_Grp4] (displayed in
3 Alm_ROV2 the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2” in

When [Ua_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Ua_Sec_Grp4] (displayed in the
When [Ua_Sec_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
4 Alm_ROV3 [U0_Alm_ROV] in the menu “Settings”->“System_Settings” is

Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Ub_Pri_Grp4] (displayed in
the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2” in
When [Ub_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Ub_Sec_Grp4] (displayed in the
When [Ub_Sec_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Uc_Pri_Grp4] (displayed in
5 Alm_ROV4 the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2” in

When [Uc_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Uc_Sec_Grp4] (displayed in the
When [Uc_Sec_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
6 Alm_SmplCh1 equipped in slot B02 and slot B03.

Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

not be issued.
1) The optical fiber linked to the RX1 input channel of AI(ECVT) module
is pulled out.
2) The AI(ECVT) module can not receive any data via the RX1 input
channel.
1) The optical fiber linked to the SV(i.e.: Sampled Valued) sampling port
of NET-DSP module is pulled out.
In conventional sampling method or IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling

method, this alarm signal is ineffective and will not be issued.
In IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module:
If any of the following events occurs, this alarm signal will be produced to
7 Alm_SmplCh2 issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA:

is pulled out.
channel.


is pulled out.
channel.

9 Alm_SmplCh4 If any of the following events occurs, this alarm signal will be produced to
is pulled out.
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
channel.

14 Alm_Pwr_BI_B08
SCADA.

15 Alm_Pwr_BI_B09
SCADA.
When AO module is equipped in slot B10 and [Opt_Type_ReguX]

(X=1,2,3,4) is set as “0 ”(i.e.: corresponding DC analog output type is “4～
20mA”), if corresponding output current circuit of AO module is open, this
16 Alm_DC_IoutX SCADA.
Note! Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details of
the setting [Opt_Type_ReguX] (X=1,2,3,4).
When AO module is equipped in slot B10, if the processing chip

temperature corresponding to the No. X(X=1,2,3,4) channel DC analog
17 Alm_ReguX_Temp
output is higher than a certain value, this alarm signal will be produced to
issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA.

19 GAlm_ADisc_SL_XX XX=01,02… 16.
GAlm_ADisc_B03_PL_XX Please refer to the “PCS-9611 and PCS-9705 GOOSE Function

20
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
22 GAlm_AStorm_B03_PL details.
24 GAlm_General_B03
29 GAlm_General_B09
SV receiving link X(X=1,2,3,4), this alarm signal will be issued and it can
be sent to SCADA.
30 SVAlm_FrameLoss_X


.
31 Alm_TimeSyn_B03

table.
“1”： slot B03 NET-DSP module.
IEEE1588 If abnormality occurs in IEEE1588 clock

Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision


“3”： module.
IRIG-B(Fiber optic) If abnormality occurs in IRIG-B(Fiber optic)

32 SVAlm_NetA_X
sent to SCADA.

link X(X=1,2,3,4) of SV B03 NET-DSP module is
33 SVAlm_NetB_X
sent to SCADA.

34 SVAlm_ConfigFile
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
4.4 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705C

Alarm signals of PCS-9705C are introduced in the following table.
Table 4.4-1 Virtual binary inputs of PCS-9705C

.

“0”：
1 Alm_TimeSyn [En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
PPS(RS-485)

module.
“1”： [En_GPSSynSample_B03]=0, or slot B03
IRIG-B(RS-485) is not equipped with NET-DSP module,
be sent to SCADA.

2 Line1_Alm_VTS Alarm signal indicating busbar 1 VT circuit failure.
3 Line2_Alm_VTS Alarm signal indicating busbar 2 VT circuit failure.
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
equipped in slot B02 and slot B03.
not be issued.
4 Alm_SmplCh1
is pulled out.
channel.
1) The optical fiber linked to the SV(i.e.: Sampled Valued) sampling port
of NET-DSP module is pulled out.


is pulled out.
channel.


is pulled out.
channel.

7 Alm_SmplCh4
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

is pulled out.
channel.

12 Alm_Pwr_BI_B08
SCADA.

13 Alm_Pwr_BI_B09
SCADA.

15 GAlm_ADisc_SL_XX XX=01,02… 16.
GAlm_ADisc_B03_PL_XX Please refer to the “PCS-9611 and PCS-9705 GOOSE Function

16
details.
20 GAlm_General_B03
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
25 GAlm_General_B09
SV receiving link X(X=1,2,3,4), this alarm signal will be issued and it can
be sent to SCADA.
26 SVAlm_FrameLoss_X


.

27 Alm_TimeSyn_B03
table.

slot B03 NET-DSP module.
“1”：
If abnormality occurs in IEEE1588 clock
IEEE1588

Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision

“3”： module.
IRIG-B(Fiber optic) If abnormality occurs in IRIG-B(Fiber optic)

28 SVAlm_NetA_X
sent to SCADA.

link X(X=1,2,3,4) of SV B03 NET-DSP module is
29 SVAlm_NetB_X
sent to SCADA.

30 SVAlm_ConfigFile
Note! In the above table, [Line1_Alm_VTS] can be generated with a delay of 2.5s when
meeting any of the following events:
1) Busbar 1 negative phase sequence (NPS) secondary voltage is in excess of 8V or
2) Any phase sequence secondary voltage of Busbar 1 is less than 30V with the presence of
any phase currents (I.e., the secondary value of anyone of the phase A/B/C current is in
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
excess of 0.06In).
Where:
If any of these 2 conditions is met and lasts for 2.5s, an alarm signal named [Line1_Alm_VTS]
will be issued. If both of these 2 conditions are not met for 10s, [Line1_Alm_VTS] will
disappear.
[Line1_Alm_VTS] can be locally displayed on LCD and sent to SCADA.
Note! In the above table, [Line2_Alm_VTS] can be generated with a delay of 2.5s when
1) Busbar 2 negative phase sequence (NPS) secondary voltage is in excess of 8V or
2) Any phase sequence secondary voltage of Busbar 2 is less than 30V with the presence of
any phase currents (I.e., the secondary value of anyone of the phase A/B/C current is in
excess of 0.06In).
Where:
If any of these 2 conditions is met and lasts for 2.5s, an alarm signal named [Line2_Alm_VTS]
will be issued. If both of these 2 conditions are not met for 10s, [Line2_Alm_VTS] will
disappear.
[Line2_Alm_VTS] can be locally displayed on LCD and sent to SCADA.
Date: 2011-08-05
4 Supervision
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
5 Hardware
5.1 Overview
The PCS-9705 series BCUs adopt modularized hardware design. Different functional
modules are shown in the following table.
Table 5.1-1 Hardware Configuration of PCS-9705
Device Type The number of this module that

Module Type
Module Type can be equipped in PCS-9705
4 subtypes of CPU modules（i.e.:

CPU module 1 NR4102C, NR4102D, NR4102J,
NR4102K） are opt ional.
AI(ECVT) module 0 or 1 NR4201B
AI(AC) module 0 or 1 NR4402
NET-DSP module 0 or 1 NR4136A
1) 3* NR4501
2) 4* NR4501
3) 5* NR4501
BI module 4) 6* NR4501
5) 4* NR4501+ 1* NR4504
6) 4* NR4501+ 2* NR4504
7) 5* NR4501+ 1* NR4504
2 subtypes of GOOSE modules （i.e.:

GOOSE module 0 or 1
NR4126A, NR4126C） are optional.
AI(DC) module 0 or 1 or 2 NR4410
AO module 0 or 1 NR4411A
BO(IL) module 0 or 1 or 2 NR4521
BO module 0~6 NR4521
PWR module 1 NR4301
Note! The BO module and the BO(IL) module share the same board: NR4521. If an
NR4521 board is equipped in B12~B13, it will be used as a BO(IL) module. If an NR4521

board is equipped in B14~B19, it will be used as a BO module.
Note! The medium of the Ethernet interface of the CPU module and GOOSE module is
optional. Different subtypes of the CPU module and GOOSE module correspond to
different Ethernet interface medium.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Note! The hardware configuration of this device must be definitely declared in the
technical scheme and the contract.
There are 20 slots in the rear panel of PCS-9705, these slots are named as B01~B 20 from
left to right by the rear view of PCS-9705.
Table 5.1-2 Module/slot configuration list
Module Type Corresponding slot
CPU module B01 must be equipped with the CPU module.

(Mandatory) CPU module can only be installed in B01.
AI(ECVT) module B02 can be equipped with the AI(ECVT) module.

(Optional) AI(ECVT) module can only be installed in B02.
B02 and B03 can be equipped with the AI(AC) module.

AI(AC) module can only be installed in B02 and B03.
AI(AC) module
(Optional)
Note! The AI(AC) module occupies 2 slots.
NET-DSP module B03 can be equipped with the NET-DSP module.

(Optional) NET-DSP module can only be installed in B03.
B04 ~ B06 must be equipped with the BI module（NR4501）.

BI module
B07 can be equipped with the BI module（NR4501）.
(B04 ~ B06:Mandatory)
B08 can be equipped with NR4501 BI module or NR4504 BI module.
(B07 ~ B09:Optional)
GOOSE module B09 can be equipped with the GOOSE module.

(Optional) GOOSE module can only be installed in B09.
AO module B10 can be equipped with the AO module.

(Optional) AO module can only be installed in B10.
AI(DC) module B10 or B11 can be equipped with the AI(DC) module.
(Optional) AI(DC) module can only be installed in B10 or B11.
BO(IL) module B12 ~ B13 can be equipped with the BO(IL) module.
(Optional) BO(IL) module can only be installed in B12~B13.
BO module B14 ~ B19 can be equipped with the BO module.

(Optional) BO module can only be installed in B14~B19.
PWR module B20 must be equipped with the PWR module.

(Mandatory) PWR module can only be installed in B20.
PCS-9700 series BCUs adopt the structure of back plug-in chassis.
PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C are designed as full width chassis.
The following figure shows the front panel of the PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 11
HEALTHY
2
ALARM
12 PCS-9705
3 13 EN BAY CONTROL UNIT
U
4 14
5 15
6 16 ENT
7 17
D JUS
T
8 18
9 19
- +
10 20
ESC
Figure 5.1-1 Front panel of PCS-9705A/B/C
The following figure shows the rear panel of the PCS-9705A without GOOSE module and
adopts conventional sampling method .
For PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C without GOOSE module and adopt conventional sampling
method, the rear panels are are similar to PCS-9705A, but the AI(AC) modules of them are
different from each other.
Note! In engineering applications, the number of the modules equipped in PCS-9705 may
be different according to the actual requirements.
Figure 5.1-2 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102C; with 6 BI modules, 1
AI(DC) modules, 2 BO(IL) modules, 6 BO modules)
The following figure shows the rear panel of the PCS-9705A with GOOSE module and
adopts conventional sampling method.
For PCS -9705B and PCS-9705C with GOOSE module and adopt conventional sampling
method, the rear panels are are similar to PCS-9705A, but the AI(AC) modules of them are
different from each other.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.1-3 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102K; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126C; with 3 NR4501 BI modules, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO modules)
adopt s IEC60044-8 digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module(e.g.:NR4201B).
For PCS-9705B and PCS -9705C with GOOSE module and adopt IEC60044-8 digital
sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module, the rear panels are similar to PCS-9705A.
Figure 5.1-4 Rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102J; GOOSE module adopts NR4126A; 4
NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module, 0 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO modules are adopted
for example)
adopts IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A).
For PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C with GOOSE module and adopt IEC61850-9-2 digital
sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module, the rear panels are similar to PCS-9705A.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.1-5 Rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102J; GOOSE module adopts NR4126A; 4
NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module, 0 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO modules are adopted
for example)
5.2 CPU Module (NR4102) on Slot B01(Mandatory)

The CPU module is a mandatory module.
CPU module must be configured in B01.
B01 must be configured with the CPU module.
CPU module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
The CPU module is the kernel part of this equipment, and contains a powerful microchip processor
and some necessary electronic elements. This powerful processor performs all of the functions for
this device: calculation, control, communication and user interface functions.
The functional details of the CPU module are listed as below:
 Calculations
Basing on the analog inputs, the CPU module can calculate the measurement values, such as
active power, reactive power and power factor etc. All these values can be sent to a SAS or a
RTU through the communication interfaces.
 Communication management
The CPU module can effectively manage the communication procedure and reliably send out
some useful information through its two Ethernet communication interfaces. A 20-pin interface
for the connection with the HMI module is contained in this module too. If an event has
occurred (such as SOE, CB tripping event etc.), this module will send out the relevant event
information through these interfaces, and make it be easily observable by the user.
 Clock Synchronization
This module has a local clock chip and an interface to receive clock synchronized
signals(IRIG-B) from an external clock source. Based on the timing message (from SAS or
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
RTU) or the IRIG-B signal, this module can make the local clock synchronize with the
standard clock.
Generally speaking, the CPU module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4102.
4 types of CPU modules（i.e.: NR4102C, NR4102D, NR4102J, NR4102K）are optional as shown
in the following 4 figures.
Each type of BCU may be equipped with any one of these 4 CPU modules.
The 1st type of CPU module (NR4102C) as shown in the following figure has 2 electrical Ethernet
ports, but has no fiber Ethernet port.
Figure 5.2-1 CPU module (NR4102C)
The connectors of all the 4 types of the CPU modules have the same connectors as shown in the
following table.
Table 5.2-1 Pin description of CPU module of this device
Pin No. Signal Description
1 SYN+
EIA RS-485 standardized interface for clock synchronization, PPS
2 SYN-
and IRIG-B signals are permitted.
3 SHLD
4 Reserved.
5 Reserved.
6 Reserved.
7 Reserved.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
2 RJ-45 Ethernet connectors are on the front of NR4102C.
Pin connection definition of the RJ-45 socket of NR4102C/ NR4102D/NR4102J/NR4102K are the
same as shown in the following table.
Table 5.2-2
Pin No. Signal Description
1 TX+ Positive TX line
2 TX- Negative TX line
3 RX+ Positive RX line
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RX- Negative RX line
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
The 2nd type of CPU (NR4102D) as shown in the following figure has 4 electrical Ethernet ports,
but has no fiber Ethernet port.
Figure 5.2-2 CPU module (NR4102D)
4 RJ-45 Ethernet connectors are on the front of this kind of CPU board.
The 3rd type of CPU (NR4102J) as shown in the following figure has 2 SC type fiber Ethernet
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
ports and 2 electrical Ethernet ports.
Figure 5.2-3 CPU module (NR4102J)
The 4th type of CPU (NR4102K) as shown in the following figure has 2 ST type fiber Ethernet
ports and 2 electrical Ethernet ports.
Figure 5.2-4 CPU module (NR4102K)
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
5.3 AI(ECVT) (NR4201B) on Slot B02 (Optional)

AI(ECVT) module is an optional module.
AI(ECVT) module can only be installed in B02.
AI(ECVT) module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the AI(ECVT) module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4201B.
The AI(ECVT) module is a digital sampling module applied in a digital substation for sampling the
current and voltage from the electronic transformer through merging units. The communication
protocol is abided by the IEC60044-8 standard protocol strictly.
The AI(ECVT) module of PCS-9705 will send these analog inputs to the CPU module for further
treatment.
As shown in the following figure, 4 ST the AI(ECVT) module on B02.
Figure 5.3-1 AI(ECVT) module（ NR4201B）
5.4 AI(AC) Module (NR4402) on Slot B02 and B03(Optional)

The AC analog input module (abbreviated AI(AC) module) is an optional module.
AI(AC) module can only be installed in B02 and B03.
Note! The width of AI(AC) module and PWR module is double of other modules. An AI(AC)
module or a PWR module occupies 2 slots while any other module only occupies 1 slot.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
The AI(AC) module is an analog input unit. It contains voltage transformers and current
transformers. It can transform these high AC input values to relevant low AC output value, which
are suited to the analog inputs of the CPU module. It also can be thought as a bridge between the
CPU module and the external analog signals that come into this device. The transformers are
used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to this devices’electronic
circuit and to provide effective isolation between this device and the power system. A low pass
filter circuit is connected to each transformer (CT and VT) secondary circuit for reducing the noise
of each analog AC input signal.
Note! The rated value of the input current transformer is optional: 1A or 5A. The rated
value of the CT must be definitely declare d in the technical scheme and the contract.
Note! Because the rated value of the input current transformer is optional, it is necessary
to check that whether the rated values of the current transformer inputs are in
accordance with the demand of the practical engineering before putting the device into
operation.
Generally speaking, the AI(AC) module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4402.
There are 3 types of AI(AC) modules providing various numbers of CT and VT separately
applicable to difference types of BCUs.
The following figure shows the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705A.
Figure 5.4-1 AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705A
Note! In the above figure, P01 means the 1st pin. P02 ,… , P26 have similar meaning.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
In the figures about pin description of this instruction manual, P01, P02, … have
similar meanings, too.
Table 5.4-1 Pin description of AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705A
Pin No. Sign Description
1 Ia
Current input of phase A.
2 Ian
3 Ib
Current input of phase B.
4 Ibn
5 Ic
Current input of phase C.
6 Icn
7 3I0
The input of the zero sequence current.
8 3I0n
9 Not used.
10 Not used.
11 Not used.
12 Not used.
13 Ua
14 Uan
15 Ub Voltage inputs for measurement, phase sequence is (A, B, C),
16 Ubn star connection (Y).
17 Uc
18 Ucn
19 3U0
The input of the zero sequence voltage.
20 3U0n
21 Usyn Voltage inputs for synchronism-check when closing the circuit
22 Un_syn breaker.
23 Not used.
24 Not used.
25 Not used.
26 Not used.
The following figure shows the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705B.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.4-2 AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705B
Table 5.4-2 Pin description of AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705B
1 U1
Voltage input of phase A.
2 Un1
3 U2
Group 1 Voltage input of phase B.
4 Un2
5 U3
Voltage input of phase C.
6 Un3
7 U4
8 Un4
9 U5
10 Un5
11 U6
12 Un6
13 U7
14 Un7
15 U8
16 Un8
17 U9
18 Un9
19 U10 Group 4 Voltage input of phase A.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
20 Un10
21 U11
Voltage input of phase B.
22 Un11
23 U12
24 Un12
25 U13
The input of the zero sequence voltage.
26 Un13
The following figure shows the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705C.
Figure 5.4-3 AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705C
Note! In 1½ CB arrangement, there are 2 circuit breakers related to this device:
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
In the following table:
“the 1st CB”mainly refers to the 1st CB in 1½ CB arrangement, it can be the Side
CB or the Center CB.
“the 2nd CB”mainly refers to the 2nd CB in 1½ CB arrangement, it can be the

Center CB or the Side CB.
Table 5.4-3 Pin description of AI(AC) module applicable for PCS-9705C
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 Ia1
2 Ia1n
3 Ib1 Current input of phase B.

When the setting [Two/Three Meter] is set as “1”, i.e.:
two-meter method is adopted, pin “203”and “204”will
Group 1
useless.
(E.g.: for the
Ib1n When the setting [Two/Three Meter] is set as “0”, i.e.:
4 1st CB)
three-meter method is adopted, pin “203”and “204”will
be used to receive the input of the 1st group current of
the phase B.
5 Ic1
6 Ic1n
7 Ia2
8 Ia2n
9 Ib2 Current input of phase B.

When the setting [Two/Three Meter] is set as “1”, i.e.:
two-meter method is adopted, pin “203”and “204”will
Group 2
useless.
(E.g.: for the
10 Ib2n When the setting [Two/Three Meter] is set as “0”, i.e.:
2nd CB )
three-meter method is adopted, pin “203”and “204”will
be used to receive the input of the 2nd group current of
the phase B.
11 Ic2
12 Ic2n
Pin “13”and “14”on the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705C
IL are used to receive independent external current input.

13
The primary value of the Independent external current is
displayed as “IL_Pri” in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”.
ILn The secondary value of the independent external

14
current is displayed as “IL_Sec” in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“BaseData2”.
15 Ua1
16 Ub1 Voltage inputs for measurement, phase sequence is (A,

Group 1
Uc1 B, C), star connection (Y).
17
(E.g.: for the
18 Un1
1st CB )
19 Usyn1 Voltage inputs for synchronism-check when closing the
Un_syn1 1st CB.

20
21 Ua2 Group 2 Voltage inputs for measurement, phase sequence is (A,
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
22 Ub2 (E.g.: for the B, C), star connection (Y).
Uc2 2nd CB )
23
24 Un2
25 Usyn2 Voltage inputs for synchronism-check when closing the
Un_syn2 2nd CB.

26
5.5 NET-DSP Module (NR4136A) on slot B03 (Optional)

The NET-DSP module is an optional module.
B03 can be equipped with the NET-DSP module.
NET-DSP module can only be installed in B03.
NET-DSP module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the NET-DSP in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4136A.
The NET-DSP module is a digital sampling module applied in a digital substation for sampling the
current and voltage from the electronic transformer through merging units. The communication
protocol is abided by the IEC61850-9-2 standard protocol strictly.
The NET-DSP module of PCS-9705 will send these analog inputs to the CPU module for further
treatment.
The NET-DSP module can also be used to transmit or receive the binary inputs via GOOSE
network. It can also trip or close the corresponding CB according to the control commands from
manual operation on PCS-9705 or from SCADA/RTU.
Note! The GOOSE function of slot B09 GOOSE module and slot B03 NET-DSP module
are the same, they can be appiled at the same time, and they can be adopted
independently. But the NET-DSP module supports the IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling
method while slot B09 GOOSE module does not support.
As shown in the following figure, the NET-DSP module (NR4136A) has 6 LC type optical Ethernet
ports（TX1/RX1, TX2/RX2, TX3/RX, TX4/RX4, TX5/RX5, TX6/RX6） for receiving or transmitting
the sampled values or GOOSE command.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
NR4136A
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
IEC60044-8
Communication port
IRIG-B
Figure 5.5-1 NET-DSP module (NR4136A)
As shown in the following figure, there are 2 ST type optical Ethernet ports:
1) IEC60044-8 Communication port: reserverd now.
2) IRIG-B: applied to receive the clock synchronization input signals. It corresponds to the clock
synchronization method “IRIG-B(Fiber optic)”.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details.
5.6 BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504) on Slot B04~B09

The binary input module (abbreviated BI module) is a mandatory module.
BI module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Two types of BI modules are provided in this device: NR4501 and NR4504.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
B04 ~ B06 must be equipped with the BI module（NR4501）.
B07 ~ B09 can be equipped with the BI module or to be empty.
B07 can be equipped with the BI module（NR4501）.
Note! If the GOOSE module is adopted, B09 must be configured with the GOOSE module,
i.e.: PCS-9705 with GOOSE module can only support up to 5 BI modules.
Every NR4501 BI module has:
20 optically isolated binary inputs;
1 auxiliary power supervision input terminal (i.e.:the 1st terminal PwrSuperv_X(X=1,2,3,4,5,6) );
1 common negative connection of all the binary inputs of this board (i.e.:the 22nd terminal
Opto-_X(X=1,2,3,4,5,6).
Each binary input is processed by a well-designed debouncing technique to avoid any hazardous
behavior (multiple state changes during a given duration). A separate debounce and chatter time
(i.e.: [t_DPU_BI001],… ,[t_DPU_BI120], please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details)
may be set for each of the binary input.
The auxiliary power supervision input terminal should be connected to the positive pole of a binary
input auxiliary power.
If the PwrSuperv_X(X=1,2,3,4,5,6) terminal of the NR4501 BI module on BXX (XX=B04, B05, B06,
B07) is not connected to positive pole of binary input auxiliary power, [Alm_Pwr_BI_BXX] (XX=B04,
B05, B06, B07, B08, B09) will be produced to issue an alarm and it can be sent to SCADA.
Every NR4504 BI module has:
13 optically isolated binary inputs;
7 common negative connections of this module, each of them corresponds to 2 binary inputs of
this module.
Each binary input is processed by a well-designed debouncing technique to avoid any hazardous
behavior (multiple state changes during a given duration). A separate debounce and chatter time
(i.e.: [t_DPU_BI081],… , [t_DPU_BI106], please Chapter “Settings”for more details) may be set
for each of the binary input.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705A.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-1 NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705A
Note!
2 subtypes of NR4501 are provided: NR4501A and NR4501D.
NR4501A and NR4501D share the same pin definition, only their working voltages of all the binary
inputs are different.
For NR4501A, the rated working voltage of all the binary inputs is 110~250Vdc.
For NR4501D, the rated working voltage of all the binary inputs is 24~48Vdc.
Note!
In application, the last letter “A”(of NR4501A) and “D”(of NR4501D) will be printed on the module,
but the last letter is omitted in the figures in this instruction manual.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501BI module on B04 of PCS-9705A.
Table 5.6-1 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705A
1 PwrSuperv_1 Power supervision of this module
Binary input of indicating the equipment is in maintenance state.

1: The device is in the maintenance mode.
0: The device is not in the maintenance mode.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for IEC103
2 BI_Maintenance
protocol is to block communication between this device and SCADA
(I.e.: HMI system) or remote terminal unit (RTU), and please refer to the
“GOOSE Function Manual”for the application of [BI_Maintenance] for
IEC61850 protocol.
A binary input for releasing the interlocking function of BCU.

3 BI_Block_Dis (1:released,
0:unreleased)
A binary input for enabling the telecontrol.

4 BI_Rmt/Loc (1: enable remote control,
0:enable local control)
If the [BI_Rmt/Loc] is 0, i.e. this device works in Local Control Mode,

when the [BI_Manual_Synchro] is 1, the function of synchronism-check
5 BI_Manual_Synchro for CB closing is started.
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the CB is closed by
manual control.
6 BI_Spare1 The 1st reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the future.
BI_Spare2 The 2nd reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the future.
7
(Tap Pos1) The 1st tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.
BI7 Binary input 7

8
(Tap Pos2) The 2nd tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.
BI8 Binary input 8

9
(Tap Pos3) The 3rd tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.
BI9 Binary input 9

10
(Tap Pos4) The 4th tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.
BI10 Binary input 10

11

12

13

14
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware

15

16

17

18

19

20

21
22 Opto-_1 Common negative connection of all the binary inputs of this module.
Note! The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 220V, 125V or 250V,
which must be definitely declared in the technical scheme and the contract. It is
necessary to check whether the rated voltage of BI module meets the demand of the
engineering before putting the relay into operation.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705B.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-2 NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705B
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705B.
Table 5.6-2 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705B

2 BI_Maintenance The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for IEC103

(I.e.: HMI system) or remote terminal unit (RTU), and please refer to
the “GOOSE Function Manual” for the application of
[BI_Maintenance] for IEC61850 pro tocol.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
A binary input for releasing the interlocking function of BCU.
3 BI_Block_Dis (1:released,
0:unreleased)
A binary input for enabling the telecontrol.
4 BI_Rmt/Loc (1: enable remote control,

The 1st reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the
5 BI_Spare1
future.
The 2nd reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the
6 BI_Spare2
future.
The 3rd reserved binary input for possible special p urpose in the
7 BI_Spare3
future.
8 BI7 Binary input 7
22 Opto-_ 1 Common negative connection of all the binary inputs of this module.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705C.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-3 NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705C
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
In the following 2 tables:
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.6-3 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B04 of PCS-9705C

2 BI_Maintenance The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for IEC103

(I.e.: HMI system) or remote terminal unit (RTU), and please refer to
the “GOOSE Function Manual” for the application of
[BI_Maintenance] for IEC61850 protocol.
A binary input for releasing the interlocking function of BCU

3 BI_Block_Dis
(1:released, 0:unreleased)
A binary input for enabling the telecontrol (1: enable remote control,
4 BI_Rmt/Loc
If the [BI_Rmt/Loc] is 0, i.e. this device works in Local Control

Mode, when the [BI_Manual_Synchro1] is 1, the function of
BI_Manual_Synchro1 synchronism-check for closing the 1st CB is started.

5
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the 1st CB wiil be
closed by manual control.
If the [BI_Rmt/Loc] is 0, i.e. this device works in Local Control

Mode, when the [BI_Manual_Synchro2] is 1, the function of
BI_Manual_Synchro2 synchronism-check for closing the 2nd CB is started.

6
When all the synchronism-check criteria are met, the 2nd CB wiil be
closed by manual control.
The 1st reserved binary input for possible special purpose in the
7 BI_Spare1
future.
15 BI1 4 Binary input 14
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705A.
Figure 5.6-4 NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705A
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705A.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.6-4 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705A

2

3

4

5

6

7
(Tap Pos21) The 21st tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.

8
(Tap Pos22) The 22nd tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.

9
(Tap Pos23) The 23rd tap position binary input can be connected to this terminal.
The terminal definition of the NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C are the
same.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-5 NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705B and
PCS-9705C.
Table 5.6-5 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B05 of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C
2 BI21 Binary input21
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
The terminal definition of the NR4501 BI module on B06 of PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and
PCS-9705C are the same.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B06 of PCS-9705.
Figure 5.6-6 NR4501 BI module on B06 of PCS-9705
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B06 of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.6-6 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B06 of PCS-9705
The terminal definitions of the NR4501 BI module on B07 of PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and
PCS-9705C are the same.
B07 of PCS-9705 can be empty with no BI module.
The following figure shows the NR4501 BI module on B07 of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-7 NR4501 BI module on B07 of PCS-9705
The following table shows the pin description of the NR4501 BI module on B07 of PCS-9705.
Table 5.6-7 Pin description of NR4501 BI module on B07 of PCS-9705
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
For PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C, the terminal definitions of B08 and B09 are the
same.
7 applications are available.
1) Both B08 and B09 are empty with no BI module.
2) B08 is equipped with NR4501 BI module while B09 is empty with no BI module.
3) B08 is equipped with NR4504 BI module while B09 is empty with no BI module.
4) B08 is equipped with NR4501 BI module while B09 is equipped with NR4504 BI module.
5) B08 is equipped with NR4504 BI module while B09 is equipped with NR4501 BI module.
6) Both B08 and B09 are equipped with NR4501 BI module.
7) Both B08 and B09 are equipped with NR4504 BI module.
The following figure shows the slot B08 NR4501 BI module in the above scheme “2)”and the slot
B08 NR4501 BI module, the slot B09 NR4504 BI module scheme “4)”.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-8 Slot B08 NR4501 BI module and slot B09 NR4504 BI modulein scheme “2)”and scheme “4 )”
Note!
2 subtypes of NR4504 are provided: NR4501A and NR4501D.
NR4504A and NR4504D share the same pin definition, only their working voltages of all the binary
inputs are different.
For NR4504A, the rated working voltage of all the binary inputs is 110~250Vdc.
For NR4504D, the rated working voltage of all the binary inputs is 24~48Vdc.
Note!
In application, the last letter “A”(of NR4504A) and “D”(of NR4504D) will be printed on the module,
but the last letter is omitted in the figures in this instruction manual.
The following table shows the pin description of slot B08 NR4501 BI module in scheme “2)”and
scheme “4)”.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.6-8 Pin description of slot B08 NR4501 BI module in scheme “2)”and scheme “4)”
The following table shows the pin description of slot B09 NR4504 BI module in scheme “4)”.
Table 5.6-9 Pin description of slot B09 NR4504 BI module in scheme “4)”
Common negative connection of the binary inputs PwrSuperv_6 and

3 Opto-_6
BI101 (Pin 1 and Pin 2) of this module.
Common negative connection of the binary inputs BI102 and BI103

6 Opto-_7
(Pin 4 and Pin 5) of this module.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware

9 Opto-_8

12 Opto-_9

15 Opto-_10

18 Opto-_11

21 Opto-_12
22 Reserved.
The following figure shows the slot B08 NR4504 BI module in the above scheme “3)”and the slot
B08 NR4504 BI module, the slot B09 NR4501 BI module scheme “5)”.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.6-9 Slot B08 NR4504 BI module and slot B09 NR4501 BI module in scheme “3)”and scheme “5)”
The following table shows the pin description of slot B08 NR4504 BI module in scheme “3)”and
scheme “5)”.
Table 5.6-10 Pin description of slot B08 NR4504 BI module in scheme “3)”and scheme “5)”

3 Opto-_5
Common negative connection of the binary inputs BI82 and BI83 (Pin
6 Opto-_6
4 and Pin 5) of this module.
9 Opto-_7
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
12 Opto-_8
15 Opto-_9
18 Opto-_10
21 Opto-_11
22 Reserved.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
For scheme “6)”(Both B08 and B09 are equipped with NR4501 BI module) , the BI modules are
shown in the following figure.
Figure 5.6-10 NR4501 BI module on slot B08 and slot B09 in scheme “6”
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
For scheme “7)”(Both B08 and B09 are equipped with NR4504 BI module) , the BI modules are
shown in the following figure.

3 Opto-_5
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
6 Opto-_6
9 Opto-_7
12 Opto-_8
15 Opto-_9
18 Opto-_10
21 Opto-_11
22 Reserved.
2 B94 Binary input 94

3 Opto-_12
6 Opto-_13
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
9 Opto-_14

12 Opto-_15

15 Opto-_16

18 Opto-_17

21 Opto-_18
22 Reserved.
5.7 GOOSE Module (NR4126) on Slot B09 (Optional)

GOOSE module is an optional module.
GOOSE module can only be installed in B09.
GOOSE module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs
Note! The medium of the Ethernet interface of the CPU module and GOOSE module is
optional. Different subtypes of the CPU module and GOOSE module correspond to
different Ethernet interface medium.
The GOOSE module is used to transmit or receive the binary inputs via GOOSE network. It can
also trip or close the corresponding CB according to the control commands from manual operation
on PCS-9705 or from SCADA/RTU.
Note! The GOOSE function of slot B09 GOOSE module and slot B03 NET-DSP module
are the same, they can be appiled at the same time, and they can be adopted
independently. But the NET-DSP module supports the IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
method while slot B09 GOOSE module does not support.
Generally speaking, the GOOSE module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4126.
2 types of GOOSE modules（i.e.: NR4126A, NR4126C） are optional as shown in the following 2
figures.
Each type of BCU may be equipped with any one of these 2 GOOSE modules.
As shown in the following figure, the 1st type of GOOSE module (NR4126A) has 2 SC type optical
Ethernet ports for receiving or transmitting the GOOSE command.
Figure 5.7-1 GOOSE module (NR4126A)
As shown in the following figure, the 2nd type of GOOSE module (NR4126C) has 2 ST type optical
Ethernet ports for receiving or transmitting the GOOSE command.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.7-2 GOOSE module (NR4126C)
5.8 AO Module (NR4411) on Slot B10(Optional)

The DC analog output module (abbreviated AO module) is an optional module.
In PCS-9705B, B10 can be equipped with the AO module if B10 is not equipped with AI(DC)
module.
AO module can only be installed in B10.
Generally speaking, the AO module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4411A.
AO module can send out up to 4 channels of 0~10V and 4~20mA output to DCS system to
regulate the active power output of the specified generator.
The DC analog output type can be configured by the settings [Opt_Type_ReguX] (X=1,2,3,4).
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details.
The following figure shows the AO modules of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.8-1 AO module (NR4511)
Table 5.8-1 Pin description of AI(DC) module of this device
1 I_out1+ 4~20mA output 1+
2 I_out1- 4~20mA output 1-
3 U_out1+ 0~10V output 1+
4 U_out1- 0~10V output 1-
5 Reserved.
6 Reserved.
11 Reserved.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
12 Reserved.
17 Reserved.
18 Reserved.
5.9 AI(DC) Module (NR4410) on Slot B10 or B11 (Optional)

The DC analog input module (abbreviated AI(DC) module) is an optional module.
AI(DC) module can be installed in B11 or B10.
In PCS-9705B, B10 can not be equipped with the AI(DC) module if B10 is already equipped with
AO module.
AI(DC) module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the AI(DC) module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4410.
AI(DC) module is a transducer input module used to interface transducer signals from transducers
(e.g.: temperature or humidity transducers).
AI(DC) module offers 8 channels of DC analog inputs and no binary input signal.
3 types of DC signals：0~250V, 0~10V and 4~20mA can be acquired, which can be selected by
setting 3 groups of jumpers on the AI(DC) module.
Note! Analog inputs between 0~4mA DC can also be processed, and all the analog inputs
between 0~4mA DC will be processed as 4mA, so we can also say that 0~20mA analog
DC input can be processed.
The jumpers setting methods are introduced in the following table.
Table 5.9-1 Description of Jumpers of AI(DC) module
Signal Input Range SX JPX-1 JPX-2
4~20mA DC
ON OFF ON
(or: 0~20mA DC)
0~10V DC OFF OFF ON
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Signal Input Range SX JPX-1 JPX-2
0~250V DC OFF ON OFF
Note! In above table, X=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. One AI(DC) module supports 8 transducer
inputs.
The following figure shows the AI(DC) modules on B11 of PCS-9705.
B11
NR4410
AI1+ 1
AI1- 2
GND 3
AI2+ 4
AI2- 5
GND 6
AI3+ 7
AI3- 8
GND 9
AI4+ 10
AI4- 11
GND 12
AI5+ 13
AI5- 14
GND 15
AI6+ 16
AI6- 17
GND 18
AI7+ 19
AI7- 20
AI8+ 21
AI8- 22
Figure 5.9-1 AI(DC) module(NR4410) on B11
Pin connections on the connector of the AI(DC) module on B11 are introduced in the following
table.
Table 5.9-2 Pin description of AI(DC) module on B11
1 AI1+ Transducer input 1+
2 AI1- Transducer input 1-
3 GND Ground connection
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
The following figure shows the AI(DC) modules on B10 of PCS-9705.
B10
NR4410
AI9+ 1
AI9- 2
GND 3
AI10+ 4
AI10- 5
GND 6
AI11+ 7
AI11- 8
GND 9
AI12+ 10
AI12- 11
GND 12
AI13+ 13
AI13- 14
GND 15
AI14+ 16
AI14- 17
GND 18
AI15+ 19
AI15- 20
AI16+ 21
AI16- 22
Figure 5.9-2 AI(DC) module(NR4410) on B10
Pin connections on the connector of the AI(DC) module on B10 are introduced in the following
table.
Table 5.9-3 Pin description of AI(DC) module on B10
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
4 AI10 + Transducer input 10+
5.10 BO(IL) Module (NR4521) on Slot B12/B13 (Optional)

The binary output for interlocking module (abbreviated BO(IL) module) is an optional module.
BO(IL) module can be configured in B12~B13.
BO(IL) module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the BO(IL) module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4521.
Note! The BO module and the BO(IL) module share the same board: NR4521. If an
NR4521 board is equipped in B12~B13, it will be used as a BO(IL) module. If an NR4521

board is equipped in BI14~B19, it will be used as a BO module.
BO(IL) module is an interlocking module which provides a normal open contact for every
remotely-controlled object when the setting [En_Hardware_Blk] is set as “1”.
When executing a switching command output, if the interlocking logic conditions are met, besides
internal software interlocking corresponds remote trip or remote closing contact, this device also
provides an additional normal open contact for the remotely-controlled object.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
If a contact is closed, it means that the interlocking criterion of corresponding binary output is met.
If a contact is open, it means that the interlocking criterion of corresponding binary output is not
met.
Interlocking criteria can be configured by interlocking configuration tool.
Note! Each BO(IL) module can only provide up to 11 open contact corresponds to each
binary output, since there are 13 binary outputs in this device, so the last 2 binary outputs
does not have corresponding contacts in the BO(IL) module.
2 BO(IL) modules are recommended to be configured in this device at the same time: one in slot
B12 and the other in slot B13.
Please refer to the following 2 figures and 2 tables for more details.
The following figure shows the BO(IL) module on B13.
Figure 5.10-1 BO(IL) module(NR4521) on B13
Pin connections of the BO(IL) module on B13 are shown in the following table.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.10-1 Pin connections of the BO(IL) module on B13
1 BO_BlkTrp1+
No.1 interlocking criteria status output contact for tripping.
2 BO_BlkTrp1-
3 BO_BlkTrp2+
4 BO_BlkTrp2-
5 BO_BlkTrp3+
6 BO_BlkTrp3-
7 BO_BlkTrp4+
8 BO_BlkTrp4-
9 BO_BlkTrp5+
10 BO_BlkTrp5-
11 BO_BlkTrp6+
12 BO_BlkTrp6-
13 BO_BlkTrp7+
14 BO_BlkTrp7-
15 BO_BlkTrp8+
16 BO_BlkTrp8-
17 BO_BlkTrp9+
18 BO_BlkTrp9-
19 BO_BlkTrp10+ No.10 interlocking criteria status output contact for
20 BO_BlkTrp10- tripping.
21 BO_BlkTrp11+ No.11 interlocking criteria status output contact for
22 BO_BlkTrp11- tripping.
The following figure shows the BO(IL) module on B12.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.10-2 BO(IL) module(NR4521) on B12
Pin connections of the BO(IL) module on B12 are shown in the following table.
Table 5.10-2 Pin connections of the BO(IL) module on B12
1 BO_BlkCls1+
No.1 interlocking criteria status output contact for closing
2 BO_BlkCls1-
3 BO_BlkCls2+
4 BO_BlkCls2-
5 BO_BlkCls3+
6 BO_BlkCls3-
7 BO_BlkCls4+
8 BO_BlkCls4-
9 BO_BlkCls5+
10 BO_BlkCls5-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
11 BO_BlkCls6+
12 BO_BlkCls6-
13 BO_BlkCls7+
14 BO_BlkCls7-
15 BO_BlkCls8+
16 BO_BlkCls8-
17 BO_BlkCls9+
18 BO_BlkCls9-
19 BO_BlkCls10+
20 BO_BlkCls10-
21 BO_BlkCls11+
22 BO_BlkCls11-
5.11 BO Module (NR4521) on Slot B14~B19 (Optional)

The binary output module (abbreviated BO module) is an optional module.
BO module can be configured in B14~B19.
BO module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the BO module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4521.
The BO module is a well-done binary output module used for tripping or closing output or for any
signaling purpose.
Up to 10 binary outputs are provided on each BO module for controlling up to 5 circuit

breakers/switches or transformer tap changer positions. By setting the closing time of normal open
contact of the binary output (i.e.: [t_Hold_Trp01],… ,[t_Hold_Trp13],
[t_Hold_Cls01] ,… ,[t_Hold_Cls13], please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details), the
user can adopt individual switchgear’
s operating time.
A normal open contact is presented via terminal 21-22 (i.e.:BO_CtrlX, X=1,2,3,4,5,6) designated
as ROS (remote operation signal). Whenever any of the normal open contacts of the binary output
relay is closed, the normal open contact ROS of ROS relay will close to issue a signal indicating
that this device is undergoing a remote operation. If none of the normal open contact of the binary
output relay is closed, the normal open contact ROS keeps open state.
13 pairs of binary outputs are provided by the BO module configured in B17~B19.
One more group of all the 13 pairs of binary outputs can be provided by the BO module configured
in B14~B16. The allocations of the binary outputs on the BO module configured in B14~B16 are
the same as the binary outputs on the BO module configured in B17~B19.
The following figure shows the BO module on B19 of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.11-1 BO module(NR4521) on B19
Pin connections of the BO module on B19 are shown in the following table.
Table 5.11-1 Pin connections of the BO module on B19
1 BO_CtrlTrp1+
Tripping output 1
2 BO_CtrlTrp1-
3 BO_CtrlCls1+
Closing output 1
4 BO_CtrlCls1-
5 BO_CtrlTrp2+
Tripping output 2
6 BO_CtrlTrp2-
7 BO_CtrlCls2+
Closing output 2
8 BO_CtrlCls2-
9 BO_CtrlTrp3+
Tripping output 3
10 BO_CtrlTrp3-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
11 BO_CtrlCls3+
Closing output 3
12 BO_CtrlCls3-
13 BO_CtrlTrp4+
Tripping output 4
14 BO_CtrlTrp4-
15 BO_CtrlCls4+
Closing output 4
16 BO_CtrlCls4-
17 BO_CtrlTrp5+
Tripping output 5
18 BO_CtrlTrp5-
19 BO_CtrlCls5+
Closing output 5
20 BO_CtrlCls5-
Remote operation signal output of this module. Whenever

21 BO_Ctrl1+
any of the binary output relay is closed, this contact will close
to issue an annunciation signal indicating that this device is
22 BO_Ctrl1-
undergoing a remote operation.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Table 5.11-2 Pin description of BO module (NR4521) on B18
1 BO_CtrlTrp6+
Tripping output 6
2 BO_CtrlTrp6-
3 BO_CtrlCls6+
Closing output 6
4 BO_CtrlCls6-
5 BO_CtrlTrp7+
Tripping output 7
6 BO_CtrlTrp7-
7 BO_CtrlCls7+
Closing output 7
8 BO_CtrlCls7-
9 BO_CtrlTrp8+
Tripping output 8
10 BO_CtrlTrp8-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
11 BO_CtrlCls8+
Closing output 8
12 BO_CtrlCls8-
13 BO_CtrlTrp9+
Tripping output 9
14 BO_CtrlTrp9-
15 BO_CtrlCls9+
Closing output 9
16 BO_CtrlCls9-
17 BO_CtrlTrp10+
Tripping output 10
18 BO_CtrlTrp10-
19 BO_CtrlCls10+
Closing output 10
20 BO_CtrlCls10-

21 BO_Ctrl2+
22 BO_Ctrl2-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 BO_CtrlTrp11+
Tripping output 11
2 BO_CtrlTrp11-
3 BO_CtrlCls11+
Closing output 11
4 BO_CtrlCls11-
5 BO_CtrlTrp12+
Tripping output 12
6 BO_CtrlTrp12-
7 BO_CtrlCls12+
Closing output 12
8 BO_CtrlCls12-
9 BO_CtrlTrp13+
Tripping output 13
10 BO_CtrlTrp13-
11 BO_CtrlCls13+
Closing output 13
12 BO_CtrlCls13-
13
Reserved.
14
15
Reserved.
16
17
Reserved.
18
19
Reserved.
20
21 BO_Ctrl3+
22 BO_Ctrl3-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 BO_CtrlTrp1 +
Tripping output 1
2 BO_CtrlTrp1-
3 BO_CtrlCls1 +
Closing output 1
4 BO_CtrlCls1-
5 BO_CtrlTrp2 +
Tripping output 2
6 BO_CtrlTrp2-
7 BO_CtrlCls2 +
Closing output 2
8 BO_CtrlCls2-
9 BO_CtrlTrp3 +
Tripping output 3
10 BO_CtrlTrp3-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
11 BO_CtrlCls3 +
Closing output 3
12 BO_CtrlCls3-
13 BO_CtrlTrp4 +
Tripping output 4
14 BO_CtrlTrp4-
15 BO_CtrlCls4 +
Closing output 4
16 BO_CtrlCls4-
17 BO_CtrlTrp5 +
Tripping output 5
18 BO_CtrlTrp5-
19 BO_CtrlCls5 +
Closing output 5
20 BO_CtrlCls5-

21 BO_Ctrl4+
22 BO_Ctrl4-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 BO_CtrlTrp6+
Tripping output 6
2 BO_CtrlTrp6-
3 BO_CtrlCls6+
Closing output 6
4 BO_CtrlCls6-
5 BO_CtrlTrp7+
Tripping output 7
6 BO_CtrlTrp7-
7 BO_CtrlCls7+
Closing output 7
8 BO_CtrlCls7-
9 BO_CtrlTrp8+
Tripping output 8
10 BO_CtrlTrp8-
11 BO_CtrlCls8+
Closing output 8
12 BO_CtrlCls8-
13 BO_CtrlTrp9+
Tripping output 9
14 BO_CtrlTrp9-
15 BO_CtrlCls9+
Closing output 9
16 BO_CtrlCls9-
17 BO_CtrlTrp10+
Tripping output 10
18 BO_CtrlTrp10-
19 BO_CtrlCls10+
Closing output 10
20 BO_CtrlCls10-

21 BO_Ctrl5+
22 BO_Ctrl5-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
1 BO_CtrlTrp11+
Tripping output 11
2 BO_CtrlTrp11-
3 BO_CtrlCls11+
Tripping output 11
4 BO_CtrlCls11-
5 BO_CtrlTrp12 +
Tripping output 12
6 BO_CtrlTrp12-
7 BO_CtrlCls12 +
Tripping output 12
8 BO_CtrlCls12-
9 BO_CtrlTrp13 +
Tripping output 13
10 BO_CtrlTrp13-
11 BO_CtrlCls13 +
Tripping output 13
12 BO_CtrlCls13-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
13
Reserved.
14
15
Reserved.
16
17
Reserved.
18
19
Reserved.
20
21 BO_Ctrl6+
22 BO_Ctrl6-
5.12 PWR Module (NR4301) on Slot B20(Mandatory)

The power supply module (abbreviated PWR module) is a mandatory module.
PWR module must be configured in B20.
B20 must be configured with the PWR module.
PWR module is applicable to all the PCS-9705 series BCUs.
Generally speaking, the PWR module in PCS-9705 adopts the board named as NR4301.
The PWR module is the power supply module used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between terminal and the battery system. An in -line fuse is wired in the PWR module for
short circuit protection.
Note! The width of AI(AC) module and PWR module is double of other modules. An AI(AC)
module or a PWR module occupies 2 slots while any other module only occupies 1 slot.
The following figure shows the PWR module of PCS-9705.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
NR4301
BO_ COM 1
BO_ FAIL 2
BO_ ALM 3
BO_ Resv1+ 4
BO_ Resv1- 5
BO_ Resv2+ 6
BO_ Resv2- 7
BO_ Resv3+ 8
BO_ Resv3- 9
BO_ Resv4+ 10
BO_ Resv4- 11
BO_ Resv5+ 12
BO_ Resv5- 13
BO_ Resv6+ 14
BO_ Resv6- 15
BO_ Resv7+ 16
BO_ Resv7- 17
BO_ Resv8+ 18
BO_ Resv8- 19
PWR+ 20
PWR- 21
GND 22
Figure 5.12-1 Front view of the PWR module(NR4301)
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of the PWR module. The terminal definition of the
connector is described as below.
Pin connections on the PWR module are shown in the following table.
Table 5.12-1 Pin description of PWR module of this device
1 BO_COM Common of the binary outputs.
2 BO_FAIL Equipment failure output.
3 BO_ALM Equipment alarm output.
4 BO_Resv1+
Reserved as user-defined binary output 1
5 BO_Resv1-
6 BO_Resv2+
7 BO_Resv2-
8 BO_Resv3+
9 BO_Resv3-
10 BO_Resv4+
11 BO_Resv4-
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
12 BO_Resv5+
13 BO_Resv5-
14 BO_Resv6+
15 BO_Resv6-
16 BO_Resv7+
17 BO_Resv7-
18 BO_Resv8+
19 BO_Resv8-
20 PWR+ DC power supply positive input.
21 PWR- DC power supply negative input.
22 GND Ground connection.
Note! It is only permitted to withdraw or insert the PWR module or some other modules
when the auxiliary power is switched off.
5.13 Rear Panel Definition

The following figures in this section show the rear panel definition of this device.
Note! The following figures show the rear panel definition of this device with the modules
as many as possible. But in engineering applications, this device may be equipped with
fewer modules.
Note! The CPU module may adopt NR4102C, NR4102D, NR4102J, NR4102K. The
GOOSE module may adopt NR4126A, NR4126C. For the sake of convenience, the
following figures will not show every subtype of the CPU module and the GOOSE
module.
Note! The following modules must be equipped in every subtype of this device.
The CPU module must be equipped in B01;
The PWR module must be equipped in B20;
3 BI modules must be equipped in B04, B05 and B06.
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705A without GOOSE module and
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-1 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102D; with 4 NR4501 BI
modules, 2 NR4504 BI modules, 2 AI(DC) modules, 2 BO(IL) modules, 6 BO modules , with no AO module)
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705A with GOOSE module and
adopts conventional sampling method.
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-2 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102K; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126C; with 4 NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3
BO modules, with no AO module)
adopts digital sampling method via slot B02 AI(ECVT) module(e.g.:NR4201B).
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-3 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102J; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126A; with 4 NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3
adopts digital sampling method via slot B03 NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A).
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-4 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705A (CPU module adopts NR4102J; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126A; with 5 NR4501 BI modules, 1 AO module,1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO
modules)
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705B without GOOSE module and
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-5 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705B (CPU module adopts NR4102C; with 4 NR4501 BI
modules, 2 NR4504 BI modules, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 6 BO modules, with no AO module)
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705B with GOOSE module and
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-6 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705B (CPU module adopts NR4102K; GOOSE module
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
adopts NR4126C; with 4 NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module , 1 AO module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL)
modules, 3 BO modules)
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
adopts NR4126C; with 5 NR4501 BI modules, 1 AO module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO
modules)
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705C without GOOSE module and
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-9 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705C (CPU module adopts NR4102K; with 4 NR4501 BI
modules, 2 NR4504 BI modules, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO modules, with no AO module)
The following figure shows the rear panel definition of PCS-9705C with GOOSE module and
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-10 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705C (CPU module adopts NR4102J; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126A; with 4 NR4501 BI modules, 1 NR4504 BI module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-11 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705C (CPU module adopts NR4102K; GOOSE module
Date: 2011-08-05
5 Hardware
Figure 5.13-12 An example of rear panel of PCS-9705C (CPU module adopts NR4102K; GOOSE module
adopts NR4126C; with 5 NR4501 BI modules, 1 AO module, 1 AI(DC) module, 2 BO(IL) modules, 3 BO
modules)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
6 Settings
6.1 Overview
The settings of this device locate in the “Settings”menu.
Please refer to “Overview” , “Settings” in the Section “Human Machine

Interface”->“Understand the HMI Menu Tree”for more details about the “Settings”menu (i.e.:
How to access the “Settings”menu).
The settings are used to determine the characteristic of operation mode of this device. It is
necessary to configure the settings of this device according to engineering demands before
putting this device into service. If the settings are not configured correctly, this device may work
abnormally (such as when communication is interrupted etc.).
Note! If a CPU module is replaced, it is necessary to configure all the settings again
according to the configuration of the CPU module which is replaced.
6.2 Device_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “Device_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.2-1 Parameter list of “Device_Settings”of PCS-9705A/B/C
No. Name Default Value [Min:Max] (Step)(Unit)
1 Un_BinaryInput 0 [0:3] (1)
The following table shows the parameter description of the “Device_Settings”of PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 6.2-2 Parameter description of “Device_Settings”of PCS-9705A/B/C
No. Name Description
The setting is used to set the voltage level of binary input module.
“0”：24V,
“1”：48V,
“2”：110V,
1 Un_BinaryInput
“3”：220V.
If low-voltage BI module is equipped, 24V or 48V can be set according
to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI module is equipped,
110V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
6.3 Comm_Settingsr for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Table 6.3-1 Parameters list of “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705A
1 Language 0 [0:1] (1)
2 Comm_Addr 0 [0:255] (1)
3 IP_LAN1 198.120.0.126 (1)

000.000.000.000
4 Mask_LAN1 255.255.0.0 (1)
~
5 IP_LAN2 198.121.0.126 (1)
255.255.255.255
6 Mask_LAN2 255.255.0.0 (1)
7 En_LAN2 0 [0:1] (1)
8 IP_LAN3 198.122.0.126 000.000.000.000 (1)

~
9 Mask_LAN3 255.255.0.0 (1)
255.255.255.255
10 En_LAN3 0 [0:1] (1)
11 IP_LAN4 198.123.0.126 000.000.000.000 (1)

~
12 Mask_LAN4 255.255.0.0 (1)
255.255.255.255
13 En_LAN4 0 [0:1] (1)
14 En_Broadcast 1 [0:1] (1)
15 Opt_TimeSyn 1 [0:1] (1)
16 HourOffset_UTC 8 [-12:12] (1) (hrs)
17 IP_Server_SNTP 65535 [0:65535] (1)
18 En_DualNet_GOOSE_B09 0 [0:1] (1)
19 Threshold_Measmt 0.20% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
20 Cycle_Measmt 30 [0:3000] (1)(s)
21 En_BICheckBO 0 [0:1] (1)
22 En_DualNet_SV 0 [0:1] (1)
23 En_DualNet_GOOSE_B03 0 [0:1] (1)
24 Opt_TimeSyn_B03 3 [1:3] (1)
(1) (point(s)
25 SampleRate_B03 4000 [1200:4800]
per second)
26 En_GPSSynSample_B03 0 [0:1] (1)
27 Opt_Mode_CT/VT 0 [0:2] (1)
28 Opt_ChMode_60044-8 1 [0:1] (1)
29 Opt_Mode_61850-9-2 0 [0:1] (1)
30 N_Ch 1 [1:4] (1)
31 Baud_60044-8 0 [0:2] (1)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
32 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT 0xbff [0: 0x3fffff] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705A.
Table 6.3-2 Parameters description of “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705A
“0”: Chinese,
1 Language
“1”: English.
The setting is the address which is used in SCADA network.
Note! This setting is only valid when the device

2 Comm_Addr
chooses IEC103 protocol. If the device chooses IEC61850, the
setting is invalid.
3 IP_LAN1 The 1st IP address of this device.
4 Mask_LAN1 The mask of the 1st IP of this device.
5 IP_LAN2 The 2nd IP address of this device.
6 Mask_LAN2 The mask of the 2nd IP of this device.
“1”： Enable the 2nd IP address and corresponding settings (i.e.:

7 En_LAN2 [IP_LAN2] and [Mask_LAN2]).
“0”： Disable the 2nd IP address and corresponding settings.
8 IP_LAN3 The 3rd IP address of this device.
9 Mask_LAN3 The mask of the 3rd IP of this device.
“1”： Enable the 3rd IP address and corresponding settings (i.e.:

“0”： Disable the 3rd IP address and corresponding settings.
11 IP_LAN4 The 4th IP address of this device.
12 Mask_LAN4 The mask of the 4th IP of this device.
“1”： Enable the 4th IP address and corresponding settings (i.e.:

“0”： Disable the 4th IP address and corresponding settings.
“1”：Enable sending message in broadcast mode via network. (IEC103)

14 En_Broadcast
“0”：Disable sending message in broadcast mode via network. (IEC103)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings

method of this device will only be determined by [Opt_TimeSyn_B03], for
more details, please refer to the setting [Opt_TimeSyn_B03] in this table.
[En_GPSSynSample_B03] is set as “0”.
15 Opt_TimeSyn
“0”：
PPS(RS-485)

“1”：
IRIG-B(RS-485)
module.
Note! For this device, SNTP (only available in IEC61850) clock
synchronization or IEC103 clock synchronization via network is

default feature and the clock synchronization feature will be
replaced if IRIG-B(RS-485) clock synchronization is applied and
[Opt_TimeSyn] is set as “1”.
If PPS(RS-485) clock synchronization is applied,
[Opt_TimeSyn] must be set as “0”, the SNTP (only available in
IEC61850) clock synchronization or IEC103 clock
synchronization via network will cooperate with PPS(RS-485)
clock synchronization.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
When the IEC61850 protocol and SNTP clock synchronization method

are adopted, this setting will be valid.
When the IRIG-B clock synchronization method is adopted, this setting
will be invalid.
If the time tags of communication messages are required according to
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), this setting will be used to set the
16 HourOffset_UTC local time of a country or area where this device is installed. If there is not
such a requirement, this setting must be set as “0”.
Example 1: In China where UTC offset is UTC +8:00, [HourOffset_UTC]
should be set as “8 hrs”.
Example 2: In Argentina where UTC offset is UTC -3:00,
[HourOffset_UTC] should be set as “-3 hrs”.
It is the address of the SNTP clock synchronization server which sends

SNTP timing messages to this device.
E.g. Suppose NET A IP address of the SNTP clock synchronization server
is 198.120.100.102, which means the 1st section of IP address is “198”,
the 2nd section is “120”, the 3rd section is “100”and the 4th section is
“102”.
The setting [IP_Server_SNTP] should be set as shown in the following
table.
Subnet mask of the Subnet mask of

SNTP clock the SNTP clock
SNTP mode synchronization synchronization
server server
17 IP_Server_SNTP
is 255.255.0.0 is 255.255.255.0
(The 3rd
Point-to-point section)x256+(the 4th The 4th section
SNTP mode section (In this example:
is selected (In this example: 102)
100×256+102=25702)
Broadcast
SNTP mode 255×256+255=65535 255
is selected
Note! If SNTP clock synchronization is not applied, this
parameter can be any integer between 1 and 65534.
Up to 2 modules can be equipped in PCS-9705 to realize GOOSE

function:
18 En_DualNet_GOOSE_B09 1) NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A which can realize GOOSE function)
2) GOOSE module(e.g.:NR4126A or NR4126C) equipped in slot B09.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
[En_DualNet_GOOSE_B09] is the logic setting to enable the slot B09

GOOSE module to work in dual/single GOOSE network mode.
“1”: The slot B09 GOOSE module is able to work in dual GOOSE network
mode.
“0”: Disable the NET B link of the slot B09 GOOSE module, and then the
slot B09 GOOSE module can only work in single GOOSE network mode.
Note! This setting will be hidden when slot B09 is empty. Only
when slot B09 is equipped with GOOSE module(NR4126A or

NR4126C) , this setting will be available.
The device can send measurement data to SCADA in 2 modes.

One is is to send periodically and the other is to send when the changing
measurement values.
In order to prevent the network congestion due to sending data to SCADA
frequently, when the variation value of measured quantity is greater than
19 Threshold_Measmt
the measurement threshold (i.e. [Threshold_Measmt]), the
corresponding measurement value will be sent to SCADA. Otherwise,
measurement values will not be sent until the time period for sending is
expired.
The setting unit is percent (%), i.e. the percent of rated values.
The setting only represents the time period when the device sends
measurement data to SCADA.
When the setting is set as “0s”, it means that the device will not send
20 Cycle_Measmt measurement data periodically forwardly, but the time inquiry issued by
SCADA still being responded by the device. This setting may be set
according to actual field condition and can be set as “0s” when the
communication function is not used.
“1”：Telecontrol result associates with the position of corresponding circuit

breaker/disconnector/earth switch (abbreviated CB/DS/ES). Even the
control command has been sent successfully, if the position of the
corresponding CB/DS/ES can not reach the aim position within
[t_Hold_TrpXX] or [t_Hold_ClsXX] (XX=01,… 13) , this device will still
21 En_BICheckBO issue a telecontrol failure information to SCADA.
“0”： Telecontrol result does not associate with the position of
corresponding CB/DS/ES.
Whether the position of the corresponding CB/DS/ES can reach the aim
position or not, this device will succeed to return to remote to SCADA
system.
[En_DualNet_GOOSE_SV] is the logic setting to enable the slot

NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A) to work in dual/single SV network
22 En_DualNet_SV
mode.
“1”: The slot NET-DSP module is able to work in dual SV network mode.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
“0”: Disable the NET B link of the slot NET-DSP module, and then the slot
NET-DSP module module can only work in single SV network mode.
Note! This setting will only be effective when slot B03 NET-DSP
module is equipped and IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling is

applied.
Up to 2 modules can be equipped in PCS-9705 to realize GOOSE

function:
1) NET-DSP module(e.g.:NR4136A which can realize GOOSE function)
2) GOOSE module(e.g.:NR4126A or NR4126C) equipped in slot B09.
[En_DualNet_GOOSE_B03] is the logic setting to enable the slot B03
NET-DSP module to work in dual/single GOOSE network mode.
23 En_DualNet_GOOSE_B03 “1”: The slot B03 NET-DSP module is able to work in dual GOOSE
network mode.
“0”: Disable the NET B link of the slot B03 NET-DSP module, and then the
slot B03 NET-DSP module can only work in single GOOSE network
mode.
module(NR4136A) is equipped.

[En_GPSSynSample_B03] is set as “0”.
For more details, please refer to the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] in this table.
24 Opt_TimeSyn_B03

table.
“1”： Adopt IEEE1588 clock synchronization via

IEEE1588 slot B03 NET-DSP module.
“2”： Adopt ulse per second (abbreviated PPS)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
PPS(Fiber optic ) clock synchronization via the fiber optic port

on slot B03 NET-DSP module.

“3”：
IRIG-B(Fiber optic)
module.
Note! For this device, SNTP (only available in IEC61850) clock
synchronization or IEC103 clock synchronization via network is

default feature and the clock synchronization feature will be
replaced if IEEE1588 clock synchronization is applied and
[Opt_TimeSyn_B03] is set as “1”.
The SNTP (only available in IEC61850) clock synchronization or
IEC103 clock synchronization via network will also be replaced if
IRIG-B(Fiber optic) clock synchronization is applied and
[Opt_TimeSyn_B03] is set as “3”.
If PPS(Fiber optic) clock synchronization is applied,
[Opt_TimeSyn_B03] must be set as “2”, the SNTP (only
available in IEC61850) clock synchronization or IEC103 clock
synchronization via network will cooperate with PPS(Fiber optic)
clock synchronization.
This setting is applied to configure the digital sampling rate of slot B03
NET-DSP module.
25 SampleRate_B03 Note! This setting will only be effective when slot B03 NET-DSP

applied.
When slot B03 is equipped with NET-DSP module.

If this setting is set as “0”, clock synchronization method via slot B03
26 En_GPSSynSample_B03 NET-DSP module is not adopted.
If this setting is set as “1”, clock synchronization method via slot B03
NET-DSP module is adopted.
Note! Only one of the 3 optional sampling methods shown as
below can be chosen at one time. This setting must be set

strictly as introduced below:
27 Opt_Mode_CT/VT 1) Conventional sampling method via AI(AC) module(e.g.:NR4402)

equipped in slot B02 and slot B03. [Opt_Mode_CT/VT] must be set
as “0”.

module(e.g.:NR4202A). [Opt_Mode_CT/VT] must be set as “1”.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings

module(e.g.:NR4136A). [Opt_Mode_CT/VT] must be set as “2”.
When slot B02 AI(ECVT) module is equipped and IEC60044-8 digital

sampling is applied:
If this setting is set as “0 ”
, 12 chann els sampling method is applied.
If this setting is set as “1 ”
, 22 channels sampling method is applied .
28 Opt_ChMode_60044-8
Note! When slot B03 NET-DSP module is equipped and
IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling is applied: this setting must be set

as “1”.
This setting is applied to select the IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling mode.

“0”：Adopt network transmission mode in IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling.
“1”：Adopt point to point mode in IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling.
29 Opt_Mode_61850-9-2

applied.
When slot B02 AI(ECVT) module is equipped and IEC60044-8 digital

sampling is applied, this setting must be configured according to the
number of fiber-optical sampling channel in application.
Note! When slot B03 NET-DSP module is equipped and

30 N_Ch
IEC61850-9-2 digital sampling is applied: this setting must be set
as “1”.
Note! When conventional sampling is applied, this setting will be
useless.
This setting is applied to configure the receiving rate of IEC60044-8 digital

sampling via B02 AI(ECVT) module.
31 Baud_60044-8 “0”： 2.5Mbps.
“1”： 5Mbps.
“2”： 10Mbps.
Only when this device is used in digital substation and adopts fiber-optical
sampling via AI(ECVT) module or NET-DSP module(i.e.: the setting
[Opt_Mode_CT/VT] is set as “1”or “2”), this setting can be enabled.
Each bit of 0-0x3fffff represents the state of one of the 22 channels in FD3
32 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT
format. Bit 1 is the least significant bit, and Bit 22 is the most significant
bit.
If a bit is set as “1”, it means the state of this channel will be considered in
calculation, the state of this channel will not be considered in calculation.
In PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C, there are 36 settings in “Comm_Settings”, the first 31 settings
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
are the same as “Comm_Settings” in PCS-9705A, the No.32~No.35 settings in the

“Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.3-3 Parameters list of “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C
32 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT1 0xbff [0: 0x3fffff] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705B and
PCS-9705C.
Table 6.3-4 Parameters description of “Comm_Settings”of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C
For AI(ECVT) module

(e.g.:NR4201B), this setting
corresponds to RX1 input channel
of NR4201B.
For NET-DSP module
(e.g.:NR4136A), this setting can be Only when this device is used in
configured for a specified channel. digital substation and adopts
Each bit corresponds to a voltage fiber-optical sampling via AI(ECVT)
input as shown in the following module or NET-DSP module（i.e.:
table. the setting [Opt_Mode_CT/VT] is

set as “1”or “2”), this setting can
Correspond to be enabled.
Bit
Each bit of 0-0xfff represents the
1 Ua of Group 1
32 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT1 state of one of the 12 channels in
2 Ub of Group 1
FD3 format. Bit 1 is the least
3 Uc of Group 1 significant bit, and Bit 12 is the
4 Ua of Group 2 most significant bit.

If a bit is set as “1”, it means the
5 Ub of Group 2
state of this channel will be
6 Uc of Group 2
considered in calculation, the state
7 Ua of Group 3 of this channel will not be
8 Ub of Group 3 considered in calculation.
9 Uc of Group 3
10 Ua of Group 4
11 Ub of Group 4
12 Uc of Group 4
33 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT2 For AI(ECVT) module
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
(e.g.:NR4201B), this setting

of NR4201B.
For NET-DSP module (e.g.:
NR4136A), this setting is useless.
For AI(ECVT) module (e.g.:

NR4201B), this setting
34 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT3
of NR4201B.
For AI(ECVT) module (e.g.:

NR4201B), this setting
35 Cfg_SmplCh_ECVT4
of NR4201B.
6.4 Function_Linksr for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Table 6.4-1 “Function_Links”list of PCS-9705A
1 Link_SynChk 0 [0:1] (1)
2 Link_DeadChk 0 [0:1] (1)
3 Link_IgnoreExtIntlck 0 [0:1] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705A.
Table 6.4-2 Parameters description of “Function_Links”of PCS-9705A
If [ Link_DeadChk] is “0”and [Link_SynChk] is “0”,

No check mode will be selected.
(No check mode: The mode not to check both the dead check
1 Link_SynChk criterion and the synchronism-check criterion.)
Dead check mode will be selected.
(Dead check mode: The mode only to check the dead check
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
criterion.)
Synchronism-check mode will be selected.
(Synchronism -check mode: The mode only to check the
2 Link_DeadChk
synchronism-check criterion.)
Dead check will be executed fisrly, if dead check criterion is not met,
then synchronism-check will be executed.
If PCS-9705 receives the anti-maloperation signals sent from local

anti-maloperation system(e.g.: Anti-maloperation Module of
PCS-9700 HMI Systemn, or the RCS-9200 Anti-maloperation
System ) and consider these signals in the interlocking criterion, we
called that “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is enabled.
If PCS -9705 does not consider the anti-maloperation signals sent
from local anti-maloperation system, we called that “Online
Anti-maloperation Mode”is disabled.
Please refer to the setting [Opt_Anti-malOP_mode] in the Section
3 Link_IgnoreExtIntlck
“Settings”->“Function_Links” for more details about “Online
Anti-maloperation Mode”.
When “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is enabled:
If [Link_IgnoreExtIntlck] is set as “1”, the interlock criterion of
PCS-9705 will ignore the interlocking conditions sent from other
devices;
PCS-9705 will consider the interlocking conditions sent from other
devices.
Parameters in the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705B are listed in the following table.
Table 6.4-3 “Function_Links”list of PCS-9705B
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705B.
Table 6.4-4 Parameters description of “Function_Links”of PCS-9705B
If PCS-9705 receives the anti-maloperation signals sent from local

anti-maloperation system(e.g.: Anti-maloperation Module of
System ) and consider these signals in the interlocking criterion, we
called that “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is enabled.
If PCS -9705 does not consider the anti-maloperation signals sent
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings

Please refer to the setting [Opt_Anti-malOP_mode] in the Section
“Settings”->“Function_Links” for more details about “Online
Anti-maloperation Mode”.
devices;
PCS-9705 will consider the interlocking conditions sent from other
devices.
Parameters in the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.4-5 “Function_Links”list of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_Link_SynChk 0 [0:1] (1)
2 Line1_Link_DeadChk 0 [0:1] (1)
3 Line2_Link_SynChk 0 [0:1] (1)
4 Line2_Link_DeadChk 0 [0:1] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Function_Links”of PCS-9705C.
Table 6.4-6 Parameters description of “Function_Links”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_Link_SynChk The same as the settings in Table 6.4-2.
2 Line1_Link_DeadChk These are the settings of the 1st group.
3 Line2_Link_SynChk The same as the settings in Table 6.4-2.
4 Line2_Link_DeadChk These are the settings of the 2nd group.
If PCS-9705 receives the anti-maloperation signals sent from

local anti-maloperation system(e.g.: Anti-maloperation Module of
System) and consider these signals in the interlocking criterion,
we called that “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is enabled.
If PCS-9705 does not consider the anti-maloperation signals sent
Please refer to the setting [Opt_Anti-malOP_mode] in the
Section “Settings”->“Function_Links” for more details about
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
“Online Anti-maloperation Mode”.

devices;
PCS-9705 will consider the interlocking conditions sent from
other devices.
6.5 GOOSE_Links for PCS-9705A/B/C

Please refer to the “GOOSE Function Manual”for the application of “GOOSE_Links”for details.
6.6 Spare_Links for PCS-9705A
Note! The menu “Spare_Links”for synchronism settings is only applied in PCS-9705A.
Parameters in the “Spare_Links”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Table 6.6-1 “Spare_Links”list of PCS-9705A
1 Link_CtrlPulse01 0 [0:1] (1)
… …
16 Link_CtrlPulse 16 0 [0:1] (1)
Table 6.6-2 Parameters description of “Spare_Links”of PCS-9705A
1 Link_CtrlPulse01 If [Link_CtrlPulseXX] is set as “1”, (XX=01,02… 16), the

… … corresponding binary output pulse via BO module can be expanded
to a longer duration to meet the requirements inapplication.
16 Link_CtrlPulse16
6.7 System_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C
Note! The menu “System_Settings” in PCS-9705A, PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C are
different.
Parameters in the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Table 6.7-1 Parameters list of “System_Settings”of PCS-9705A
1 Opt_SysFreq 50Hz 2 Options to be selected:
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
“0”：50Hz
“1”：60Hz.
2 U1n_VT_Measmt 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
3 U2n_VT_Measmt 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
4 U1n_VT_Syn 63.51kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
5 U2n_VT_Syn 63.51V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
6 U1n_VT_U0 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
7 U2n_VT_U0 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
8 I1n_CT_Measmt 1000.00A [1,8000] (0.01)( A)
9 I2n_CT_Measmt 5A [1,5] (1)( A)
10 I1n_CT_I0 1000.00A [0,8000] (0.01)( A)
11 I2n_CT_I0 5A [1,5] (1)( A)
12 Opt_CT_Measmt 0 [0:1] (1)
13 En_Alm_ROV 1 [0:1] (1)
14 U0_Alm_ROV 4.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705A.
Table 6.7-2 Parameters description of “System_Settings ”of PCS-9705A
This device can work under different system frequencies. This

setting is used to set the rated frequency that this device works
under.
1 Opt_SysFreq
2 Options to be selected:
“0”：50Hz;
“1”：60Hz.
2 U1n_VT_Measmt Rated primary reference voltage.

Note! All of
these refer to
3 U2n_VT_Measmt Rated secondary reference voltage.
phase-to-phase
voltages.
Determined by
[Opt_U_SynChk] in the
submenu
4 U1n_VT_Syn Rated primary incoming voltage.
“Syn_Settings”of the
menu “Settings”.
If [Opt_U_SynChk] is
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
set as “0”, “1”and “

2 ”,
these 2 parameters will
adopt phase voltages.
If [Opt_U_SynChk] is
5 U2n_VT_Syn Rated secondary incoming voltage.
set as “3”, “4”and “
5 ”,
these 2 parameters will
adopt phase-to-phase
voltages.
6 U1n_VT_U0 Rated primary value of zero sequence VT.
7 U2n_VT_U0 Rated secondary value of zero sequence VT.
8 I1n_CT_Measmt Rated primary current.

Note! All of
9 I2n_CT_Measmt Rated secondary current. these refer to

phase currents.
10 I1n_CT_I0 Rated primary value of zero sequence CT.
11 I2n_CT_I0 Rated secondary value of zero sequence CT.
“1”: To adopt two-meter method for current measurement.

In two-meter method, Ia and Ic inputs are enough for current
measurement.
12 Opt_CT_Measmt
“0”: To adopt three-meter method for current measurement.
In three-meter method, Ia, Ib & Ic inputs are necessary for current
measurement.
“1”：Enable the alarm fuction to issue [Alm_ROV].

13 En_Alm_ROV
“0”：Disable the alarm fuction to issue [Alm_ROV].
[U0_Alm_ROV] is expressed as a percentage.

If the [En_Alm_ROV] is enabled and the primary 3U0 voltage input
(i.e.: [3U0Ext_Pri] displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”in PCS-9705A) is
higher than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more than 10s, and
then [Alm_ROV] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
When [3U0Ext_Pri] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0 ] for
14 U0_Alm_ROV more than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV] will disappear.
If the [En_Alm_ROV] is enabled and the secondary 3U0 voltage
input (i.e.: [3U0Ext_Sec] displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values”in PCS-9705A)
is higher than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for more than 10s, and
then [Alm_ROV] will be issued and it can be sent to SCADA.
more than 1s, the alarm signal [Alm_ROV] will disappear.
Parameters in the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705B are listed in the following table.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Table 6.7-3 Parameters list of “System_Settings”of PCS-9705B
1 Opt_SysFreq 50Hz “0”：50Hz
“1”：60Hz.
2 U1n_VT1 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
3 U2n_VT1 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
4 U1n_VT2 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
5 U2n_VT2 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
6 U1n_VT3 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
7 U2n_VT3 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
8 U1n_VT4 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
9 U2n_VT4 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
10 U1n_VT_U0 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
11 U2n_VT_U0 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
12 En_VT4_U0 0 [0:1] (1)
13 U0_Alm_ROV 4.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
14 Opt_Mode_CT/VT 0 [0:2] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705B.
Table 6.7-4 Parameters description of “System_Settings”of PCS-9705B
This device can work under different system frequencies. This setting
is used to set the rated frequency that this device works under.
1 Opt_SysFreq 2 Options to be selected:
“0”：50Hz;
“1”：60Hz.
Corresponding Note! All of

The 1st group rated to the input of
2 U1n_VT1
primary busbar voltage. these refer to
the 1st group
phase-to-phase
voltage input via
voltages.
1~pin6 (“U1”~
The 1st group rated “U3n”on AI(AC)
3 U2n_VT1 secondary busbar module of
voltage. PCS-9705B).
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Corresponding
The 2nd group rated to the input of
4 U1n_VT2
primary busbar voltage. the 2nd group
voltage input via
pin 7~pin12
The 2nd group rated (“U4”~ “U6n”on
5 U2n_VT2 secondary phase AI(AC) module
voltage. of PCS-9705B).
Corresponding
The 3rd group rated to the input of
6 U1n_VT3
primary busbar voltage. the 3rd group
voltage input via
pin 13~pin18
The 3rd group rated (“U7”~ “U9n”on
7 U2n_VT3 secondary busbar AI(AC) module
voltage. of PCS-9705B).
Corresponding
The 4th group rated to the input of

8 U1n_VT4
primary busbar voltage. the 4th group
voltage input via
pin 19~pin24
The 4th group rated (“U10”~ “U12n”

on AI(AC)
9 U2n_VT4 secondary busbar
voltage. module of
PCS-9705B).
Rated primary value of

10 U1n_VT_U0 Corresponding to the zero sequence
zero sequence VT.
voltage input via pin 25 “U13”and pin 26
Rated secondary value
11 U2n_VT_U0 “U13n”on AI(AC) module of PCS-9705B).
of zero sequence VT.
“1”：Enable the 4th group voltage inputs (Pin 19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n”

on AI(AC) module) to receive.3 external zero sequence voltage inputs.
12 En_VT4_U0
“0”：The 4th group voltage inputs are not applied to receive.3 external
zero sequence voltage inputs.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
This setting is designed for 4 alarm signals:

1) For [Alm_ROV1]:
If the primary 3U0 voltage input (i.e.: [3U0Ext_Pri] displayed in the
submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2 ” in
PCS-9705B) is higher than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for more
than 10s, and then [Alm_ROV1] will be issued and it can be sent to
SCADA.
When [3U0Ext_Pri] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0] for
If the secondary 3U0 voltage input (i.e.: [3U0Ext_Sec] displayed in the
submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values2” in
SCADA.
2) For [Alm_ROV2]
19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n”on AI(AC) module) is disabled to receive.3
13 U0_Alm_ROV 19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n”on AI(AC) module) is enabled to receive.3
external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Ua_Pri_Grp4] (displayed
in the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2”in
SCADA.
When [Ua_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0 ] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Ua_Sec_Grp4] (displayed in the
SCADA.
When [Ua_Sec_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
3) For [Alm_ROV3]
19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n”on AI(AC) module) is enabled to receive.3
external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Ub_Pri_Grp4] (displayed
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings

SCADA.
When [Ub_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0 ] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Ub_Sec_Grp4] (displayed in the
SCADA.
4) For [Alm_ROV4]
19~pin24:“U10”~ “U12n”on AI(AC) module) is enabled to receive.3
external zero sequence voltage inputs, and [Uc_Pri_Grp4] (displayed
SCADA.
When [Uc_Pri_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U1n_VT_U0 ] for
If [En_VT4_U0] is enabled and [Uc_Sec_Grp4 ] (displayed in the
SCADA.
When [Uc_Sec_Grp4] is lower than [U0_Alm_ROV]*[U2n_VT_U0] for
Parameters in the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.7-5 Parameters list of “System_Settings”of PCS-9705C
1 Opt_SysFreq 50Hz “0”：50Hz
“1”：60Hz.
2 Line1_U1n_VT_Measmt 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
3 Line1_U2n_VT_Measmt 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
4 Line1_U1n_VT_Syn 63.51kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
5 Line1_U2n_VT_Syn 63.51V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
6 Line1_I1n_CT_Measmt 1000.00A [1,8000] (0.01)( A)
7 Line1_I2n_CT_Measmt 5A [1,5] (1)( A)
8 Line2_U1n_VT_Measmt 110.00kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
9 Line2_U2n_VT_Measmt 110.00V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
10 Line2_U1n_VT_Syn 63.51kV [0.1,1000] (0.01)(kV)
11 Line2_U2n_VT_Syn 63.51V [0.1,200] (0.01)(V)
12 Line2_I1n_CT_Measmt 1000.00A [1,8000] (0.01)( A)
13 Line2_I2n_CT_Measmt 5A [1,5] (1)( A)
14 Line_I1n_CT_Measmt 1000.00A [1,8000] (0.01)( A)
15 Line_I2n_CT_Measmt 5A [1,5] (1)( A)
16 Opt_CT_Measmt 0 [0:1] (1)
17 En_I1_Inverted 0 [0:1] (1)
18 En_I2_Inverted 0 [0:1] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “System_Settings”of PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.

Table 6.7-6 Parameters description of “System_Settings ”of PCS-9705C
This device can work under different system frequencies. This

setting is used to set the rated frequency that this device works
under.
1 Opt_SysFreq
“0”：50Hz;
“1”：60Hz.
Rated primary reference voltage of

2 Line1_U1n_VT_Measmt Note! All of these
the 1st CB.
3 Line1_U2n_VT_Measmt Rated secondary reference voltage refer to
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
of the 1st CB. phase-to-phase

voltages.
Determined by
Rated primary incoming voltage of
4 Line1_U1n_VT_Syn submenu
the 1st CB.
“Settings”->“Syn_Settings”.
If [Opt_U_SynChk] is set as
“0”, “1 ”and “2”, these 2
parameters will adopt phase
voltages.
Rated secondary incoming voltage
5 Line1_U2n_VT_Syn “3”, “4 ”and “5”, these 2
of the 1st CB.
parameters will adopt
phase-to-phase voltages.
6 Line1_I1n_CT_Measmt Rated primary current of the 1st CB. Note! All of these
Rated secondary current of the 1st refer to phase

7 Line1_I2n_CT_Measmt
CB. currents.
Rated primary reference voltage of

8 Line2_U1n_VT_Measmt Note! All of these
the 2nd CB.
refer to
Rated secondary reference voltage phase-to-phase
9 Line2_U2n_VT_Measmt
of the 2nd CB. voltages.
Determined by
Rated primary incoming voltage of submenu
10 Line2_U1n_VT_Syn
the 2nd CB. “Settings”->“Syn_Settings”.
“0”, “1 ”and “2”, these 2
parameters will adopt phase
voltages.
Rated secondary incoming voltage If [Opt_U_SynChk] is set as
11 Line2_U2n_VT_Syn
of the 2nd CB. “3”, “4 ”and “5”, these 2
parameters will adopt
phase-to-phase voltages.
12 Line2_I1n_CT_Measmt Rated primary current of the 2nd CB. Note! All of these
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Rated secondary current of the 2nd refer to phase

13 Line2_I2n_CT_Measmt
CB. currents.
Rated primary current of the circuit in

14 Line_I1n_CT_Measmt
1½ CB arrangement.
Rated secondary current of the

15 Line_I2n_CT_Measmt
circuit in 1½ CB arrangement.
“1”: To adopt two-meter method for current measurement.

In two-meter method, Ia and Ic inputs are enough for current
measurement.
16 Opt_CT_Measmt
“0”: To adopt three-meter method for current measurement.
In three-meter method, Ia, Ib & Ic inputs are necessary for current
measurement.
In 1½ CB arrangement, the circuit current values are calculated by

the vector summation of the measured values of the 2 circuit
breakers (Side CB and Center CB).
Let the current of the circuit be Line_I,
17 En_I1_Inverted
the measured current through the 1st CB is Line1_I,
the measured current through the 2nd CB is Line2_I,
If [En_I1_Inverted]=[En_I2_Inverted]=0:
Line_I= Line1_I + Line2_I;
If [En_I1_Inverted]=1, [En_I2_Inverted]=0:
Line_I= －Line1_I + Line2_I;
If [En_I1_Inverted]=0, [En_I2_Inverted]=1:
Line_I= Line1_I －Line2_I;
If [En_I1_Inverted]=[En_I2_Inverted]= 1:
18 En_I2_Inverted
Line_I= －Line1_I －Line2_I.
The settings [En_I1_Inverted] and [En_I2_Inverted] are ONLY
effective on the summation of circuit current and have no effect to
ALL other measurements.
6.8 AR_Settings for PCS-9705A
Note! “AR_Settings”menu is only applied in PCS-9705A.
These settings are reserved for auto-reclosing settings.
6.9 Syn_Settings for PCS-9705A
Note! The menu “Syn_Settings”for synchronism settings is only applied in PCS-9705A.
Parameters in the “Syn_Settings”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Table 6.9-1 Parameters list of “Syn_Settings”of PCS-9705A
1 U_UV_SynChk 79.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
2 U_Diff_SynChk 5.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
3 f_Diff_SynChk 1.00Hz [0:2] (0.01) (Hz)
4 df/dt_SynChk 3.00Hz/s [0:3] (0.01)) (Hz/s)
5 phi_Diff_SynChk 10° [0:60] (0.01) (°)
6 t_Reset_SynChk 25000ms [1000:30000] (1) (ms)
7 Opt_Mode_DeadChk 6 [0:6] (1)
8 En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk 1 [0:1] (1)
9 En_VTS_Blk_SynChk 1 [0:1] (1)
10 t_Close_CB 80ms [20:1000] (1) (ms)
11 phi_Comp_Diff 30° [0:360] (0.01) ( °)
12 Opt_U_SynChk 1 [0:5] (1)
13 U_DeadChk 30.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
14 U_LiveChk 70.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
Parameters description of the “Syn_Settings”of PCS-9705A is shown in the following table.
Table 6.9-2 Parameters description of “Syn_Settings”of PCS-9705A
[U_UV_SynChk] is the threshold of low voltage to block CB closing, and it

is expressed as a percentage.
If either of both sides of the CB for synchronism-check is less than this
setting, CB closing is disabled. i.e.: CB closing will be disabled when
1) Any phase-to-phase primary reference voltage (i.e.: Uab_Pri, Ubc _Pri
or Uca_Pri) is less than [U_UV_SynChk]*[U1n_VT_Measmt].
2) Any phase-to-phase secondary reference voltage (i.e.: Uab_Sec,
Ubc_Sec or Uca_Sec) is less than
[U_UV_SynChk]*[U2n_VT_Measmt].
1 U_UV_SynChk
3) Any phase primary reference voltage (i.e.: Ua_Pri, Ub_Pri or Uc_Pri)
is less than [U_UV_SynChk]*[U1n_VT_Measmt] / 1.732.
4) Any phase secondary reference voltage (i.e.: Ua_Sec, Ub_Sec or
Uc_Sec) is less than [U_UV_SynChk]*[U2n_VT_Measmt] / 1.732.
5) Usyn_Pri (i.e.: the primary value of the incoming voltage for CB
synchronism-check) is less than [U_UV_SynChk]*[U1n_VT_Syn].
6) Usyn_Sec (i.e.: the secondary value of the incoming voltage for CB
synchronism-check) is less than [U_UV_SynChk]*[U2n_VT_Syn].
Note! Uab_Sec, Ubc_Sec, Uca_Sec, Ua_Sec, Ub_Sec, Uc_Sec,
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Usyn_Sec are displayed in the submenu

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values”in
PCS-9705A.
Ua_Pri, Ub_Pri, Uc_Pri, Uab_Pri, Ubc_Pri, Uca_Pri, Usyn_Pri
are displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”in
PCS-9705A.
[U_Diff_SynChk] is the threshold of voltage difference to block CB

closing, and it is expressed as a percentage.
When the voltage difference between both sides of the CB for
synchronism-check is greater than this setting, CB closing is disabled.
If [Opt_U_SynChk] is set as ”0”,”1”or “2 ”(i.e.: the synchronism voltage is
set as phase voltage), CB closing will be disabled when meeting any of
the following events:
1) [U_Diff_Pri] (i.e.: the primary voltage difference between reference
side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check) is greater than
[U_Diff_SynChk]*[U1n_VT_Measmt] /1.732.
2) [U_Diff_Sec] (i.e.: the secondary voltage difference between
reference side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check) is
2 U_Diff_SynChk greater than [U_Diff_SynChk]*[U2n_VT_Measmt] /1.732.
If [Opt_U_SynChk] is set as ”3”,”4”or “5 ”(i.e.: the synchronism voltage is
set as phase-to-phase voltage), CB closing will be disabled when meeting
any of the following events:
1) [U_Diff_Pri] (i.e.: the primary voltage difference between reference
side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check) is greater than
[U_Diff_SynChk]*[U1n_VT_Measmt].
2) [U_Diff_Sec] (i.e.: the secondary voltage difference between
reference side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check) is
greater than [U_Diff_SynChk]*[U2n_VT_Measmt].
Note! [U_Diff_Sec], [U_Diff_Pri] are displayed in the submenu
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Synchrocheck”in PCS-9705A.
Threshold of frequency difference between both sides of the CB (Δf =

|f-fsyn |) for synchronism-check.
3 f_Diff_SynChk
When the Δf between both sides of the CB for synchronism-check is
greater than this setting in synchronism-check, CB closing is disabled.
Threshold of frequency difference rate-of-change (dΔf/dt) between both

sides of the CB for synchronism-check.
4 df/dt_SynChk
When the dΔf/dt between both sides of the CB for synchronism-check is
greater than this setting in synchronism-check, CB closing is disabled.
Threshold of phase-angle difference between both sides of the CB for

5 phi_Diff_SynChk
synchronism-check.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
When the phase-angle difference between the 2 voltages on both sides of

the CB involved for synchronism-check is greater than this setting, CB
closing is disabled.
When this device is set to work in Synchronism-check mode,

synchronism-check criteria must be met to close CB. From receiving a
closing command, this device will continuously check whether the 2
voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in dead check
can meet the synchronism-check criteria. If the synchronism-check criteria
are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk], after [t_Reset_SynChk], this device
will not check the synchronism-check criteria any longer, the failure of
synchronism-check will be confirmed and an alarm signal
If the synchronism-check criteria are met during the time

[t_Reset_SynChk], the CB will be closed.
6 t_Reset_SynChk
When this device is set to work in Dead check mode, dead check criteria
must be met to close CB. Dead check mode is determined by the setting
[Opt_Mode_DeadChk]. From receiving a closing command, this device
will continuously check whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and
reference voltage) involved in dead check can meet the dead check
criteria. If the dead check criteria are not met in [t_Reset_SynChk], after
[t_Reset_SynChk], this device will not check the dead check criteria any
longer, the failure of dead check will be confirmed and an alarm signal
If the dead check criteria are met during the time [t_Reset_SynChk], the
CB will be closed.
Dead check mode is determined by the setting [Opt_Mode_DeadChk].

[Opt_Mode_DeadChk] Corresponding dead check criterion
Both the incoming side and the reference

0
side adopt dead check.
The incoming side adopts live check and

1
the reference side adopts dead check.
7 Opt_Mode_DeadChk The incoming side adopts dead check

2
and the reference side adopts live check.
3 The reference side adopts dead check.
4 The incoming side adopts dead check .

5 the reference side adopts dead check.
Or:
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
The incoming side adopts dead check


the reference side adopts dead check.
Or:
The incoming side adopts dead check
6
Or:
Both the incoming side and the reference
side adopt dead check.
NOTE:[Opt_Mode_DeadChk] will only be valid when this device
is set to work in Dead check mode.
NOTE:In this table, the criterion for dead check is:
a voltage will be regarded as a dead voltage if it is lower

than [U_DeadChk].
the criterion for live check is:
a voltage will be regarded as a live voltage if it is higher
than [U_LiveChk].
When [Alm_VTS] is issued, if [En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk] is enabled as “1”,

dead check method will be blocked.
8 En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk
If [En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk] is enabled as “0”, dead check method will not
be blocked.
When [Alm_VTS] is issued, if [En_VTS_Blk_SynChk] is enabled as “1”,

synchronism-check method will be blocked.
9 En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
If [En_VTS_Blk_SynChk] is enabled as “0”, synchronism-check method
will not be blocked.
Circuit breaker closing time.

10 t_Close_CB It is the time from receiving closing command pulse till the CB is
completely closed.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Compensation angle for incoming voltage.

In the synchronism-check criterion, the summation of the reference
voltage angle and [phi_Comp_Diff] will be compared with the incoming
voltage angle.
[phi_Comp_Diff] is applied to deal with various extra phase angle
differences as introduced below:
1) If the reference side and incoming side adopt the voltages of different
sides of the transformer (For two- winding transformer: HV side and
LV side; for three-winding transformer: HV side, MV side and LV
side), a phase angle difference will be generated due to different
connection groups of the transformer.
E.g.:For a two-winding transformer with Y/△11 connection group, if
11 phi_Comp_Diff
the reference side and incoming side of this device adopt the
voltages of different sides of this transformer, and then a phase angle
difference of 30° will exist between the reference voltage and
incoming voltage.
2) If the reference side and incoming side adopt the voltages of different
phases, and then a phase angle difference will be generated due to
different phases of the voltages.
E.g.: If the reference voltage of this device adopts phase A, and the
incoming voltage of this device adopts phase B, a phase angle
difference of 120° will exist between the reference voltage and
incoming voltage.
3) Phase angle differences generated by other factors.
Synchronism voltage type is determined by [Opt_U_SynChk] as shown in

the following table.
[Opt_U_SynChk] Corresponding synchronism voltage type
0 Ua
1 Ub
2 Uc
12 Opt_U_SynChk 3 Uab
4 Ubc
5 Uca
NOTE:If [Opt_U_SynChk] is set as ”0”,”1” or “2”(i.e.: the
synchronism voltage is set as phase voltage), but the input

incoming voltage adopts a VT with 100V rated voltage, then the
incoming voltage will be converted to a voltage with 57.74V rated
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
voltage automatically.
This setting is expressed as a percentage.

13 U_DeadChk When this device is set to work in Dead check mode, a voltage will be
regarded as a dead voltage if it is lower than this setting.
This setting is expressed as a percentage.

14 U_LiveChk When this device is set to work in Dead check mode, a voltage will be
regarded as a live voltage if it is higher than this setting.
6.10 Syn_Settings1 and Syn_Settings2 for PCS-9705C

Parameters in the “Syn_Settings1”of PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.10-1 Parameters list of “Syn_Settings1”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_U_UV_SynChk 79.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
2 Line1_U_Diff_SynChk 5.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
3 Line1_f_Diff_SynChk 0.10Hz [0:2] (0.01) (Hz)
4 Line1_df/dt_SynChk 1.00Hz/s [0:3] (0.01)) (Hz/s)
5 Line1_phi_Diff_SynChk 30° [0:60] (0.01) (°)
6 Line1_t_Reset_SynChk 25000.000ms [1000:30000] (0.01) (ms)
7 Line1_Opt_Mode_DeadChk 0 [0:6] (1)
8 Line1_En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk 0 [0:1] (1)
9 Line1_En_VTS_Blk_SynChk 0 [0:1] (1)
10 Line1_t_Close_ CB 120ms [20:1000] (0.01) (ms)
11 Line1_phi_Comp_Diff 0 [0:360] (0.01) (°)
12 Line1_Opt_U_SynChk 0 [0:5] (1)
13 Line1_U_DeadChk 30.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
14 Line1_U_LiveChk 70.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
Parameters in the “Syn_Settings2”of PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.10-2 Parameters list of “Syn_Settings2”of PCS-9705C
1 Line2_U_UV_SynChk 79.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
2 Line2_U_Diff_SynChk 5.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
3 Line2_f_Diff_SynChk 0 .10Hz [0:2] (0.01) (Hz)
4 Line2_df/dt_SynChk 1.00Hz/s [0:3] (0.01)) (Hz/s)
5 Line2_phi_Diff_SynChk 30° [0:60] (0.01) (°)
6 Line2_t_Reset_SynChk 25000.000ms [1000:30000] (0.01) (ms)
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
7 Line2_Opt_Mode_DeadChk 0 [0:6] (1)
8 Line2_En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk 0 [0:1] (1)
9 Line2_En_VTS_Blk_SynChk 0 [0:1] (1)
10 Line2_t_Close_CB 120ms [20:1000] (0.01) (ms)
11 Line2_phi_Comp_Diff 0 [0:360] (0.01) (°)
12 Line2_Opt_U_SynChk 0 [0:5] (1)
13 Line2_U_DeadChk 30.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
14 Line2_U_LiveChk 70.00% [0.00%:100.00%] (0.01)(%)
Parameters description of the “Syn_Settings1”of PCS-9705C is shown in the following table.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
In the following 2 tables:

Table 6.10-3 Parameters description of “Syn_Settings1”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_U_UV_SynChk
2 Line1_U_Diff_SynChk
3 Line1_f_Diff_SynChk
4 Line1_df/dt_SynChk
5 Line1_phi_Diff_SynChk
The settings [Line1_XX] have the same functions as
6 Line1_t_Reset_SynChk corresponding settings [XX] in Table 6.9-2.
7 Line1_Opt_Mode_DeadChk [XX] of PCS-9705A are applied for the CB
8 Line1_En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk synchronism-check.
[Line1_XX] of PCS-9705C are applied for the 1st CB
9 Line1_En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
synchronism-check in 1½ CB arrangement.
10 Line1_t_Close_CB
11 Line1_phi_Comp_Diff
12 Line1_Opt_U_SynChk
13 Line1_U_DeadChk
14 Line1_U_LiveChk
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Parameters description of the “Syn_Settings2”of PCS-9705C is shown in the following table.
Table 6.10-4 Parameters description of “Syn_Settings2”of PCS-9705C
1 Line2_U_UV_SynChk
2 Line2_U_Diff_SynChk
3 Line2_f_Diff_SynChk
4 Line2_df/dt_SynChk
5 Line2_phi_Diff_SynChk
The settings [Line2_XX] have the same functions as
6 Line2_t_Reset_SynChk corresponding settings [XX] in Table 6.9-2.
7 Line2_Opt_Mode_DeadChk [XX] of PCS-9705A are applied for the CB
8 Line2_En_VTS_Blk_DeadChk synchronism-check.
[Line2_XX] of PCS-9705C are applied for the 2nd CB
9 Line2_En_VTS_Blk_SynChk
synchronism-check in 1½ CB arrangement.
10 Line2_t_Close_CB
11 Line2_phi_Comp_Diff
12 Line2_Opt_U_SynChk
13 Line2_U_DeadChk
14 Line2_U_LiveChk
6.11 BI_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “BI_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.11-1 Parameters list of “BI_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
1 t_DPU_BI01 20ms [0:60000] (ms) (1) (ms)
… … … … …
120 t_DPU_BI120 20ms [0:60000] (ms) (1) (ms)
121 t_VBI 50ms [0:60000] (ms) (1) (ms)
Note! 120 Binary inputs and GOOSE module can not be chosen at the same time. When
GOOSE module is chosen, PCS-9705 can only support up to 100 binary inputs.
Note! “DPU”is the abbreviation of “the debouncing time of Delay Pick Up”.
Binary input state is processed by well-designed anti-jitter technique. Every binary input is
corresponding to a parameter named as [t_DPU_BIXX] (XX=1,… ,120), i.e. the signal state
change confirmation time. The default value is 20ms. It can be set up to be longer to ensure a fine
binary signal input according to the specific application.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
The 1st terminal of each BI module is the Power supervision (PwrSuperv) terminal.
If the PwrSuperv_X(X=1,2,3,4,5,6) terminal of the BI module on slot BXX (BXX=B04, B05, B06,
B07, B08, B09) is not connected to positive pole of binary input auxiliary power,
[Alm_Pwr_BI_BXX] (BXX=B04, B05, B06, B07, B08, B09) will be issued and it can be sent to
SCADA.
[t_VBI]: The signal state change confirmation time for all the virtual double point binary inputs.
PCS-9705 supports up to 16 virtual double point binary inputs （i.e.: [Sig_DP01]… [Sig_DP16]
displayed in the submenu “Test”->“Internal_Signal”）.
If a double point binary input changes to 0x00 or 0x11(i.e.: double point information error occurs),
the anti-jitter technique will be applied. [t_VBI] will be regarded as the debouncing time for all the
virtual double point binary inputs of PCS-9705.
If a double point binary inputs changed to 0x01 or 0x10(i.e.: no double point information error), the
anti-jitter technique will not be applied.
6.12 Control_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “Control_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.12-1 Parameters list of “Control_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
1 t_Hold_Trp01 1020 [0: 65535] (1)(ms)
2 t_Hold_Cls01 1020 [0: 65535] (1)(ms)
… … … … …
25 t_Hold_Trp13 1020 [0: 65535] (1)(ms)
26 t_Hold_Cls13 1020 [0: 65535] (1)(ms)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Control_Settings” of

PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 6.12-2 Parameters description of “Control_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
Holding time of a normal open contact of remote tripping XX to trip CB,

1 t_Hold_TrpXX
disconnector or for signaling purpose .
Holding time of a normal open contact of remote closing XX to close

2 t_Hold_ClsXX
CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose.
Note! In the above table, XX=01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,11,12,13.
But if this device is not equipped with the maximum number of BO boards, only the
[t_Hold_TrpXX], [t_Hold_ClsXX] which correspond to existing tripping/closing outputs are
meaningful.
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
6.13 TP_Settings for PCS-9705A
Note! “TP_Settings”menu is only applied in PCS-9705A.
Parameters in the “TP_Settings”of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Table 6.13-1 Parameters list of “TP_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A
1 Num_TapPos 0 [0:23] (1)
2 Code_TapPos 0 [0:3] (1)
3 t_DPU_TapPos 50ms [0:6000] (1)(ms)
4 En_Slide_TapPos 0 [0:1] (1)
5 t_Slide_TapPos 500ms [0:65535] (1)(ms)
 [Num_TapPos]: Step numbers of tap position.
[Num_TapPos], i.e. Numbers of tap position in the above table is set as the maximum
number of transformer tap position. If the [Num_TapPos] is less than 23, binary input
(6+[Num_TapPos]) to 28 is used as conventional binary input purpose.
For example, [Num_TapPos] is 23, the transformer tap-position is 10, and then binary input
28 to 6 indicate as “00000000000001000000000”.
For another example, if [Num_TapPos] is 20 and currently, the transformer tap-position is 10,
then binary input (6+20) to 28, i.e. binary input 26 to 28 is used as conventional binary input
purpose, and binary 25 to 6 indicate as “00000000001000000000”.
 [Code_TapPos]: It is the access mode of the tap position of the transformer.
Binary inputs 1 to 5 are for other applications, only binary inputs 6 to 28 are for the tap position
indication.
There are 4 modes among 0, 1, 2 and 3.
1) When [Code_TapPos] is set as 0, binary inputs 6 to 28 are not used for tap position
indication (abbreviated TPI).
2) When [Code_TapPos] is set as 1, binary inputs 6 to 11 using BCD coding to indicate

transformer tap-position.
Binary inputs 12 to 28 are not used for TPI.
Binary input 6 is the least significant bit and binary input 11 is the most significant bit. The first
4 bits are in binary numbers while the 5th bit and the 6th bit represent ten and twenty
respectively.
Some examples are shown as follows:
E.g.1: If the transform tap position is 5, then binary inputs 6 to 11 (the bits start from right
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
side) are indicating as “00 0101”.
3) When [Code_TapPos] is set as 2, the transformer tap-positions are connected to binary inputs
6 to 18 in sequence.
Binary inputs 19 to 28 are not used for TPI.
Binary input 6 is the least significant bit and binary input 18 is the most significant bit. The 13
bits are separated into 2 segments, the first segment of binary inputs 6 to 15 denote unit
positions, i.e.0~9; the second segment of binary inputs 16 to 18 denote the tap positions
lower than 10, between 11 and 19 and over 20 respectively.
E.g.1: If the transformer tap-position is 5, then binary inputs 6 to 18 (the bits start from right
side) indicate as “0010000100000”.
E.g.2: If the transformer tap-position is 15, then binary inputs 6 to 18 (the bits start from
right side) indicate as “0100000100000”.
E.g.3: If the transformer tap-position is 25, then binary inputs 6 to 18 (the bits start from
right side) indicate as “1000000100000”.
4) When [Code_TapPos] is set as 3, the transformer tap-position is connected to binary inputs 6

to 28 in single point way.
Binary inputs 6 to 28 represent tap positions 1 to 23 respectively.
Only 1 binary input would be set as 1 among binary inputs 6 to 28.
Binary input 6 is connected to the lowest tap position of the transformer.
Binary input 28 is connected to the highest tap position of the transformer.
E.g.1: If binary input 6 is set as 1 and binary inputs 7 to 28 are all set as 0, it indicate the tap
position is 1.
E.g.2: If binary input 28 is set as 1 and binary inputs 6 to 27 are all set as 0, it indicate the tap
position is 23.
Application of [Code_TapPos] is shown in the following table.
Table 6.13-2 Application of [Code_TapPos]
Application
Name
[Code_TapPos]=0 [Code_TapPos]=1 [Code_TapPos]=2 [Code_TapPos]=3
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Application
Name
BI 1 BI_Maintenance
BI 2 BI_Block_Dis
BI 3 BI_Rmt/Loc
BI 4 BI_Manual_Synchro
BI 5 BI_Spare1
BI 6 BI_Spare2 1 0
BI 7 Binary input 7 2 1
BI 12 Binary input 12 Binary input 12 6
Denote the tap Binary inputs 6 to

BI 16 Binary input 16 Binary input 16 positions lower 28 represent tap
than 10 positions 1 to 23
Denote the tap respectively.
BI 17 Binary input 17 Binary input 17 positions lower Only 1 binary input
than 10 would be set as 1
among binary inputs
Denote the tap
BI 18 Binary input 18 Binary input 18 6 to 28.
positions over 20
BI 19 Binary input 19 Binary input 19 Binary input 19
BI 29 Binary input 29
… …
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Application
Name
BI XX Binary input XX
 [t_DPU_TapPos]: Debouncing time limit of tap position, it has the same meaning with binary
input jitter-free time limit of status.
“DPU”is the abbreviation of “the debouncing time of Delay Pick Up”.
 [En_Slide_TapPos]:
“1”: To enable slide-tap-position blocking function to automatically stop a transformer’

s tap position
from abnormally stepping down or stepping up suddenly.
“0”: The BCU will not block the tap positioning function.
 [t_Slide_TapPos]:
The time setting of tripping for dealing with the slide of transformer tap position.
6.14 Regulation_Settings for PCS-9705B
Note! This submenu is only valid in the PCS-9705B which sends DC voltage/current
output to DCS system to regulate the active power output of the specified generator via
AO module.
Parameters in the “Regulation_Settings”menu of PCS-9705B are listed in the following table.
Table 6.14-1 Parameters list of “Regulation_Settings”menu of PCS-9705B
1 Opt_Type_Regu1 0 [0: 1] (1)
2 Min_Regu1 0 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
3 Max_Regu1 250 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
4 Opt_Type_Regu2 0 [0: 1] (1)
5 Min_Regu 2 0 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
6 Max_Regu2 250 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
7 Opt_Type_Regu3 0 [0: 1] (1)
8 Min_Regu 3 0 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
9 Max_Regu3 250 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
10 Opt_Type_Regu4 0 [0: 1] (1)
11 Min_Regu 4 0 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
12 Max_Regu4 250 [-65535: 65535] (0.01)(V or mA)
 [Opt_Type_ReguX]
X=1,2,3,4
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
This setting is applied to set the DC analog output type for regulation.
Table 6.14-2 Description of regulation output t ype
[Opt_Type_ReguX] Corresponding DC Analog Output
0 4～20mA
1 0～10V
 [Min_ReguX]: Minimum regulation value of DC analog output.
 [Max_ReguX]: Maximum regulation value of DC analog output.
6.15 Interlock_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C

Parameters in the “Interlock_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C are listed in the following table.
Table 6.15-1 Parameters list of “Interlock_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
1 Opt_Anti-malOP_mode 1 [0:2] (1)
2 En_Hardware_Blk 0 [0:1] (1)
3 En_Trp01_Blk 0 [0:1] (1)
4 En_Cls01_Blk 0 [0:1] (1)
… … … … …
27 En_Trp13_Blk 0 [0:1] (1)
28 En_Cls13_Blk 0 [0:1] (1)
The following table shows the parameters description of the “Interlock_Settings” of

PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 6.15-2 Parameters description of “Interlock_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
This setting is applied in configuring Online Anti-maloperation

Mode.
If PCS-9705 receives the anti-maloperation signals sent from
local anti-maloperation system(e.g.: Anti-maloperation Module of
PCS-9700 HMI System, or the RCS-9200 Anti-maloperation
System) and consider these signals in the interlocking criterion,
1 Opt_Anti-malOP_mode we called that “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is enabled.
If PCS-9705 does not consider the anti-maloperation signals sent
When [BI_Rmt/Loc] is “0”, i.e. PCS-9705 works in Local Control
Mode, “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is disabled.
When [BI_Rmt/Loc] is “1”, this device works in Remotel Control
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
Mode:
If this setting is set as “0”, “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is
disabled.
If this setting is set as “1”, “Online Anti-maloperation Mode”is
enabled.
If this setting is set as “2”, PCS-9705 will receive the
Remote/Local status signal(e.g.:[En_CC_Ctrl]) of the remote
terminal unit (RTU, e.g.:RCS-9698G or RCS-9698H)
If the Remote/Local status signal is “1”, it means that the RTU is in
“Remote” status and the control commands from the control
centers are effective, and then in PCS-9705, “Online
Anti-maloperation Mode”will be disabled.
If the Remote/Local status signal is “0”, it means that the RTU is in
“Local” status and the control commands from local
anti-maloperation system are effective, then in PCS-97 05, “Online
Anti-maloperation Mode”will be enabled.
“1”: To enable interlocking criteria status output contact funtion of

the BO(IL) module.
“0”: To disable interlocking criteria status output contact funtion of
the BO(IL) module.
2 En_Hardware_Blk
Note! If no BO(IL) module is equipped in this device.the
setting [En_Hardware_Blk] is meaningless, and then

[En_Hardware_Blk] should be set as “0”.
En_Trp01_Blk The items in this submenu are applied together with

3
[Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX] in the submenu
“Status”->“Interlock_Status”. (XX=01~13)
“1”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is controlled by the

interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) If the interlocking conditions are
… …
met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=1), tripping output XX has output,
otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=0) tripping output XX has no
output.
“0”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is not controlled by the
27 En_Trp13_Blk interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) Whether the interlocking
conditions are met or not, tripping output XX has output.
The items in this submenu are applied together with

4 En_Cls01_Blk
[Sig_En_CtrlClsXX] in the submenu
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
“Status”->“Interlock_Status”. (XX=01~13)
… …
“1”: Closing output XX of the BO module is controlled by the
interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) If the interlocking conditions are
met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=1), closing output XX has output,
otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=0) closing output XX has no
output.
28 En_Cls13_Blk
“0”: Closing output XX of the BO module is not controlled by the
interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) Whether the interlocking
conditions are met or not, closing output XX has output.
6.16 Transducer_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C
Note! This submenu is only valid in the PCS-9705 which acquires DC voltage/current
intput from transducers (e.g.: temperature or humidity transducers) via AI(DC) module.
Parameters in the “Transducer_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C are listed in the following

table.
Table 6.16-1 Parameters list of “Transducer_Settings”menu of PCS-9705A/B/C
1 Opt_Type_Transducer01 2 [0:2] (1)
2 Min_Transducer01 0 [－320:320] (0.01)（V or mA）
3 Max_Transducer01 250 [－320:320] (0.01)（V or mA）
… … … … …
… Opt_Type_TransducerXX 2 [0:2] (1)
… Min_TransducerXX 0 [－320:320] (0.01)（V or mA）
… Max_TransducerXX 250 [－320:320] (0.01)（V or mA）
Note! In the above table, XX=01,02,03,,… ,08 if only 1 AI(DC) module is equipped in slot
B11; XX=01,02,03,… ,16 if 2 AI(DC) modules are equipped in slot B11 and B10.
 [Opt_Type_TransducerXX]
This setting is applied to set the DC analog transducer type, and.It cooperates with the
jumpers on the AI(DC) module to match the DC analog input.
Table 6.16-2 Description of transducer type
[Opt_Type_TransducerXX] Corresponding DC Analog Input
0 0～10V
1 4～20mA
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Settings
2 0～250V
 [Min_TransducerXX]: Minimum value measured by the transducer. E.g. If the temperature

range is -50℃~50℃. Then [Min_TransducerXX] = -50.
 [Max_TransducerXX]: Maximum value measured by the transducer. E.g. If the temperature

range is -50℃~50℃. Then [Max_TransducerXX] = 50.
6.17 AC_Calbr_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C

This menu consists of the parameters to adjust the accuracy of AC analog input manually.
Note! The function is used to maintain this device and has already been set by the
manufacturer. It is strongly recommended that the users not to adjust it.
6.18 DC_Calbr_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C
This menu consists of the parameters to adjust the accuracy of DC analog input manually.
Note! The function is used to maintain this device and has already been set by the
manufacturer. It is strongly recommended that the users not to adjust it.
Date: 2011-08-05
7 Human Machine Interface

Human-machine interface (abbreviated HMI) is an important component of the equipment. It is a
convenient facility to access this device from the front local control panel of the device to view the
desired information, such as measurement quantity or binary inputs’state or program version, etc,
or modify some system settings. This function is very helpful during commissioning before putting
the equipment into service.
This chapter will describe HMI, menu tree and LCD display of the equipment. In addition, how to
input settings using keypad is described in detail.
7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Design
The human-machine interface consists of an HMI module which allows communication to be as
simple as possible for the user. The HMI module includes:
 A 320×240-dot matrix backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status,
fault diagnostics and setting, etc.
 Two LED indicators on the front panel of this device for denoting the status of this equipment.
 A 2-keys multifunctional knob keyboard on the front panel of the device for full access to the
device.
1 11
HEALTHY
2
ALARM
12 PCS-9705
3 13 EN BAY CONTROL UNIT
U
M
4 14
5 15
6 16 ENT
7 17
D JUS
A
8 18
9 19
- +
10 20
ESC
Figure 7.1-1 Front panel of PCS-9705A/B/C
7.1.2 Functionality
 The HMI module helps to draw your attention to something that has occurred which may
activate a LED or a report display on the LCD.
 You as the operator can view any data of your interest.
 Using the menus user can navigate through menu commands and locate the data of interest.
Date: 2011-08-05
7.1.3 Knob Keyboard
U
A
T
Figure 7.1-2 Knob keypad on the front panel
The knob keyboard is located in the front of the device panel, which is convenient for users to
obtain data and the fixed value through operation.
The knob keyboard has two multifunctional keys, each of which can be knobbed and confirmed in
two directions.
By pressing the above “(ENT)”key we can confirm the current operation and access the next
menu;
By Pressing the below “(ESC)”key we can cancel the current operation, and return to the former
menu.
By tunring the above “(MENU)”knob we can switch between different pages of current submenu.
By tunring the below “ADJUST”knob we can switch between different submenus.
7.1.4 LED indicatiors

There are 2 LED indicators, which can indicate the operational state of this device.
The following figure shows the LED indicators on the front panel of the device.
HEALTHY
ALARM
Figure 7.1-3 LED indicators
The following table shows the description of LED indicators on the front panel of the device.
Table 7.1-1 Description of LED indicators
Label Display Descriptions
When the equipment is out of DC power supply or any hardware defect

Off
HEALTHY is detected during self-test.
Steady Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.
Date: 2011-08-05
Label Display Descriptions
Off When the equipment is in normal operating condition.

ALARM
Steady Yellow Lit when any abnormality alarm is issued.
NOTE:
 “ALARM”LED is turned on as long as alarm exists. When alarm signals disappear, it will be
turned off.
7.2 Understand the LCD Display

7.2.1 Normal Display
Under normal condition, this device will display the measured value of this device; meanwhile, it
will display the system time, GPS clock status and the last byte of the IP.
GPS clock status is on the left above area of the LCD:
N : The clock synchronization of this device is not realized.
S : The clock synchronization of this device is realized.
N Addr 126 2009-08-01 08:41:22
Ia_Sec: 0.000 A 0.000 A

Ib_Sec: 0.000 A 0.000 A
Ic_Sec: 0.000 A 0.000 A
3I0Ext_Sec: 0.000 A 0.000 A
Ua_Sec: 0.000 V 0.000 kV
Ub_Sec: 0.000 V 0.000 kV
Uc_Sec: 0.000 V 0.000 kV
Uab_Sec: 0.000 V 0.000 kV
3U0Ext_Sec: 0.000 V 0.000 kV
P_Sec: 0.000 W 0.000 kW
Q_Sec: 0.000 Var 0.000 MVar
COS: 0.000 0.000
f: 50.000 Hz 50.000 Hz
Figure 7.2-1 An example of normal LCD display of PCS-9705
7.2.2 Alarm Display

If any self-supervision alarms are issued, the LCD of PCS-9705 will show the self-supervision
alarms. Only when the self-supervision alarms disappear, the LCD of PCS-9705 will change to the
normal display.
The following figure shows an example of the LCD display of PCS-9705 when there is some alarm
signals.The LCD display may differ according to different alarm signals.
Date: 2011-08-05
Figure 7.2-2 Alarm Display of the LCD of PCS-9705A/B/C
7.3 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

7.3.1 Overview
This section will mainly show the menu structure of this device and will introduce every submenu
of the HMI in details.
Under normal condition, press “MENU”or knob the “MENU”button will enter the “MainMenu”of
PCS-9705.
Note! The following figures show the menu trees of PCS-9705 with the submenus as many
as possible. In engineering applications, PCS-9705 may be configured with fewer

submenus.
The following figure shows the menu structure of PCS-9705A.
Date: 2011-08-05
MAIN MENU of PCS-9705A
Analog Settings Test
Mesaurement s Device_Settings Comm_Test

Comm_Settings
Primary_Values
Function_ Links All Test
Secondary_Values
Trip Test
GOOSE_Links
Power
Alarm Test
Spare_Links
Harmonics
BinChange Test
System_Settings
Synchrocheck
AR_Settings
DC_Input_Pri_Val
Syn_Settings Force_Measurement
DC_ Input_Sec_Val
Internal_Signal
BI_Settings
GOOSE_Analog
AC_Auto_Calibration
Control_Settings
DC_Auto_Calibration
TP_Settings
Status Interlock_Settings DC_Zero_Adjust
GOOSE_Comm _Counter
Transducer_Settings
Inputs SV_Comm_Counter
AC_Calbr_Settings
DC_Calbr_Settings CBTrip_Counter
Contact_Inputs
GOOSE_Inputs
Interlock_Info
Outputs
GOOSE_Outputs GOOSE_Interlock
Local_Cmd
Tap_Position IEC 103_Interlock
Interlock _Status
Download Clock
Superv_State Clear_Interlock _File
Language
Clear_Statistics
AR_Sig
Manual_ Control
Records
Disturb_Records
Superv_Events
IO_Events
Device_Logs Information
Control_Logs Version_Info
Clear_Records
Figure 7.3-1 Menu structure of PCS-9705A
The following figure shows the menu tree structure of PCS-9705B.
Date: 2011-08-05
Figure 7.3-2 Menu structure of PCS-9705B
The following figure shows the menu tree structure of PCS-9705C.
Date: 2011-08-05
MAIN MENU of PCS-9705C
Analog Settings Test
Mesaurement s Device_Settings Comm_Test

Comm_Settings
Line_Data
All Test
Function_ Links
BaseData1
GOOSE_Links Trip Test
PowerData1
Alarm Test
System_Settings
BaseData2
Syn_Settings1 BinChange Test
PowerData2
Syn_Settings2
Harmonics1
BI_Settings Force_Measurement
Harmonics2
Control_Settings Internal_Signal
Primary_Values
Interlock_Settings AC_Auto_Calibration
Synchrocheck
DC_Auto_Calibration
Transducer_Settings
DC _Input_Pri_Val
AC_Calbr_Settings DC_Zero_Adjust
DC_Input_ Sec_Val
DC_Calbr_Settings GOOSE_Comm _Counter
GOOSE_Analog
SV_Comm_Counter
CBTrip_Counter
Status
Interlock_Info
Inputs
Contact_Inputs GOOSE_Interlock
Local_Cmd
GOOSE_Inputs IEC 103_Interlock
Outputs Download Clock

Clear_Interlock _File
Interlock _Status Language
Clear_Statistics
Superv_State Manual_ Control
Records
Superv_Events
IO_Events
Information
Device_Logs
Control_Logs Version_Info
Clear_Records
Figure 7.3-3 Menu structure of PCS-9705C
7.3.2 Analog
This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current, voltage and phase
angle. This menu and “Status”menu can fully reflects of the running environment of the device. As
long as the displayed values consist with the actual running situation, basically, the device can
work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on
site.
Locate the cursor on “Analog”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key to
access the submenu “Measurements”.
Locate the cursor on “Measurements”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”
key to access the submenus.
The submenus in the “Measurements”menu of PCS-9705A are listed in the following table.
Table 7.3-1 Description of “Analog”->“Measurements”of PCS-9705A
No. Sign Description
1 Primary_Values Display the primary value of the AC analog inputs.
Date: 2011-08-05
Display the main secondary measured value, including voltage, current,

2 Secondary_Values
frequency, P, Q, S and Cos.
3 Power Display the P, Q, S and Cos of each phase.
4 Harmonics Display the harmonic voltages (Harmonic orders: 1-15).
Display the [phi_Diff], [f_Diff], [df/dt], [U_Diff_Sec], [U_Diff_Pri]

5 Synchrocheck
between reference side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check.
Display the primary values of the DC analog inputs on the AI(DC)

6 DC_Input_Pri_Val
module.
Display the secondary values of the DC analog inputs on the AI(DC)

7 DC_Input_Sec_Val
module.
8 GOOSE_Analog Display the original analog values sampled by the GOOSE module.
The submenus in the “Measurements”menu of PCS-9705B are listed in the following table.
Table 7.3-2 Description of “Analog”->“Measurements”of PCS-9705B
1 Primary_Values1 Display the 1st group primary value of the AC analog inputs.
2 Primary_Values2 Display the 2nd group primary value of the AC analog inputs.
3 Secondary_Values1 Display the 1st group primary value of the AC analog inputs.
4 Secondary_Values2 Display the 2nd group primary value of the AC analog inputs.
5 Frequency Display the frequencies.
6 Harmonics1 Display the 1st group harmonic voltages (Harmonic orders: 1-15).
7 Harmonics2 Display the 2nd group harmonic voltages (Harmonic orders: 1-15).
8 DC_Input_Pri_Val Display the primary values of the DC analog inputs via transducer.
9 DC_Input_Sec_Val Display the secondary values of the DC analog inputs via transducer.
Display the DC voltage/current output values for regulation. Please refer

to the Section “Operation Theory”->“Regulation”for more details.
11 Regulation_Outputs
Note! If this device does not have regulation functions, this
submenu will be hidden.
The submenus in the “Measurements”menu of PCS-9705C are listed in the following table.
Table 7.3-3 Description of “Analog”->“Measurements”of PCS-9705C
Display the primary/secondary values of the circuit in 1 ½ CB

arrangement.
1 Line_Data In 1½ CB arrangement, the circuit current values are calculated by the

vector summation of the measured values of the 2 circuit breakers (Side
CB and Center CB).
Date: 2011-08-05
The primary values of the 2 circuit breakers are displayed in the

submenu “Primary_Values”.
The secondary values of the 2 circuit breakers are displayed in the
submenus “BaseData1”, “PowerData1”, “BaseData2 ” and
“PowerData2”.
For the 1st CB in 1 ½ CB arrangement, the secondary values are

2 BaseData1
displayed in the submenus “BaseData1”.
For the 1st CB in 1½ CB arrangement, the P, Q, S (secondary values)

3 PowerData1
and Cos of each phase are displayed in the submenus “PowerData1”.
For the 1st CB in 1 ½ CB arrangement, the secondary values are

4 BaseData2
displayed in the submenus “BaseData2”.
For the 1st CB in 1½ CB arrangement, the P, Q, S (secondary values)

5 PowerData2
and Cos of each phase are displayed in the submenus “PowerData2”.
6 Harmonics1 Display the 1st group harmonic voltages (Harmonic orders: 1-15).
7 Harmonics2 Display the 2nd group harmonic voltages (Harmonic orders: 1-15).
For the 2 circuit breakers in 1½ CB arrangement, the secondary values

8 Primary_Values
are displayed in the submenus “Primary_Values”.
For the 2 circuit breakers in 1 ½ CB arrangement, relative values

between reference side and incoming side for CB synchronism-check
9 Synchrocheck are displayed in the submenus “Synchrocheck”, including:

[Line1_phi_Diff], [Line1_f_Diff], [Line1_df/dt], [Line1_U_Diff_Sec];
[Line2_phi_Diff], [Line2_f_Diff], [Line2_df/dt], [Line2_U_Diff_Sec].
10 DC_Input_Pri_Val Display the primary values of the DC analog inputs via transducer.
11 DC_Input_Sec_Val Display the secondary values of the DC analog inputs via transducer.
7.3.2.1 Primary_Values for PCS-9705A
The following table shows the parameters description of the submenu

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-4 Parameters description of “Primary_Values”of PCS-9705A
1 Ia_Pri
2 Ib_Pri The primary values of three-phase currents.
3 Ic_Pri
4 3I0Ext_Pri The primary value of the zero-sequence current input.
5 Ua_Pri
6 Ub_Pri The primary values of three-phase voltages.
7 Uc_Pri
8 Uab_Pri The primary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages.
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Ubc_Pri
10 Uca_Pri
11 3U0Ext_Pri The primary value of the zero-sequence voltage input.
12 U1_Pri The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage.
13 U2_Pri The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage.
14 Usyn_Pri The primary value of the incoming voltage for CB synchronism-check.
15 P_Pri The primary value of the active power.
16 Q_Pri The primary value of the reactive power.
17 S_Pri The primary value of the apparent power.
Zero-sequence current calculated depending on the vector summation

18 3I0Cal_Pri
of Ia _Pri, Ib_Pri and Ic_Pri (i.e. 3I0Cal_Pri =Ia_Pri +Ib _Pri +Ic_Pri).
Zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the vector summation

19 3U0Cal_Pri
of Ua _Pri, Ub_ Pri and Uc_Pri (i.e. 3U0Cal_Pri=Ua _Pri+Ub _Pri +Uc_Pri).
7.3.2.2 Primary_Values1 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values1”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-5 Parameters description of “Primary_Values1”of PCS-9705B
1 Ua_Pri_Grp1
2 Ub_Pri_Grp1 The primary values of the three-phase voltages of the 1st group.
3 Uc_Pri_Grp1
4 Uab_Pri_Grp1
5 Ubc_Pri_Grp1 The primary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 1st group.
6 Uca_Pri_Grp1
7 3U0Cal_Pri_Grp1 of Ua_Pri_Grp1, Ub_Pri_Grp1 and Uc_Pri_Grp1 (i.e.

3U0Cal_Pri_Grp1= Ua_Pri_Grp1 + Ub_Pri_Grp1 + Uc_Pri_Grp1).
8 U1_Pri_Grp1 The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 1st group.
9 U2_Pri_Grp1 The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 1st group.
10 Ua_Pri_Grp2
11 Ub_Pri_Grp2 The primary values of the three-phase voltages of the 2nd group.
12 Uc_Pri_Grp2
13 Uab_Pri_Grp2
14 Ubc_Pri_Grp2 The primary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 2nd group.
15 Uca_Pri_Grp2
Date: 2011-08-05

17 U1_Pri_Grp2 The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 2nd group.
18 U2_Pri_Grp2 The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 2nd group.
7.3.2.3 Primary_Values2 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values2”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-6 Parameters description of “Primary_Values2”of PCS-9705B
1 Ua_Pri_Grp3
2 Ub_Pri_Grp3 The primary values of the three-phase voltages of the 3rd group.
3 Uc_Pri_Grp3
4 Uab_Pri_Grp3
5 Ubc_Pri_Grp3 The primary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 3rd group.
6 Uca_Pri_Grp3

8 U1_Pri_Grp3 The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 3rd group.
9 U2_Pri_Grp3 The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 3rd group.
10 Ua_Pri_Grp4
11 Ub_Pri_Grp4 The primary values of the three-phase voltages of the 4th group.
12 Uc_Pri_Grp4
13 Uab_Pri_Grp4
14 Ubc_Pri_Grp4 The primary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 4th group.
15 Uca_Pri_Grp4

17 U1_Pri_Grp4 The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 4th group.
18 U2_Pri_Grp4 The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 4th group.
19 3U0Ext_Pri The primary value of the zero-sequence voltage input.
7.3.2.4 Secondary_Values for PCS-9705A
Date: 2011-08-05
“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-7 Parameters description of “Secondary_Values”of PCS-9705A
1 Ia_Sec
2 Ib_Sec The secondary values of three-phase currents.
3 Ic_Sec
Zero-sequence current derived at the neutral current circuit from

4 3I0Ext_Sec
three-phase currents.
5 Ua_Sec
6 Ub_Sec The secondary values of three-phase voltages.
7 Uc_Sec
8 Uab_Sec
9 Ubc_Sec The secondary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages.
10 Uca_Sec
Zero-sequence voltage derived at the neutral voltage circuit from

11 3U0Ext_Sec
three-phase voltages.
12 U1_Sec The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage.
13 U2_Sec The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage.
14 Usyn_Sec The secondary value of the incoming voltage for CB synchronism-check.
The reference side frequency which is often applied in

15 f
synchronism-check for closing the circuit breaker.
The incoming side frequency which is often applied in

16 fsyn
synchronism-check for closing the circuit breaker.
17 P_Sec The secondary value of the active power.
18 Q_Sec The secondary value of the reactive power.
19 S_Sec The secondary value of the apparent power.
20 Cos Power factor
Zero-sequence current calculated depending on the vector summation of

21 3I0Cal_Sec
Ia_Sec, I b_Sec and Ic_Sec (i.e. 3I0Cal_Sec =I a_Sec +Ib _Sec +Ic_Sec).
22 3U0Cal_Sec of Ua_Sec, Ub _Sec and U c_Sec (i.e. 3U0Cal_Sec=Ua _Sec +Ub_Sec

+Uc_Sec).
7.3.2.5 Secondary_Values1 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values1”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-8 Parameters description of “Secondary_Values1”of PCS-9705B
Date: 2011-08-05
1 Ua_Sec_Grp1
2 Ub_Sec_Grp1 The secondary values of the three-phase voltages of the 1st group.
3 Uc_Sec_Grp1
4 Uab_Sec_Grp1
The secondary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 1st
5 Ubc_Sec_Grp1
group.
6 Uca_Sec_Grp1
7 3U0Cal_Sec_Grp1 of Ua_Sec_Grp1, Ub_Sec_Grp1 and Uc_Sec_Grp1 (i.e.

3U0Cal_Sec_Grp1= Ua_Sec_Grp1 + Ub_Sec_Grp1 + Uc_Sec_Grp1).
8 U1_Sec_Grp1 The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 1st group.
9 U2_Sec_Grp1 The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 1st group.
10 Ua_Sec_Grp2
11 Ub_Sec_Grp2 The secondary values of the three-phase voltages of the 2nd group.
12 Uc_Sec_Grp2
13 Uab_Sec_Grp2
The secondary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 2nd
14 Ubc_Sec_Grp2
group.
15 Uca_Sec_Grp2

17 U1_Sec_Grp2 The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 2nd group.
The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 2nd

18 U2_Sec_Grp2
group.
7.3.2.6 Secondary_Values2 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Secondary_Values2”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-9 Parameters description of “Secondary_Values2”of PCS-9705B
1 Ua_Sec_Grp3
2 Ub_Sec_Grp3 The secondary values of the three-phase voltages of the 3rd group.
3 Uc_Sec_Grp3
4 Uab_Sec_Grp3
The secondary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 3rd
5 Ubc_Sec_Grp3
group.
6 Uca_Sec_Grp3
7 3U0Cal_Sec_Grp3 Zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the vector summation
Date: 2011-08-05
of Ua_Sec_Grp3, Ub_Sec_Grp3 and Uc_Sec_Grp3 (i.e.

8 U1_Sec_Grp3 The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 3rd group.
9 U2_Sec_Grp3 The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 3rd group.
10 Ua_Sec_Grp4
11 Ub_Sec_Grp4 The secondary values of the three-phase voltages of the 4th group.
12 Uc_Sec_Grp4
13 Uab_Sec_Grp4
The secondary values of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 4th
14 Ubc_Sec_Grp4
group.
15 Uca_Sec_Grp4

17 U1_Sec_Grp4 The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 4th group.
18 U2_Sec_Grp4 The secondary value of the negative -sequence voltage of the 4th group.
19 3U0Ext_Pri The secondary value of the zero-sequence voltage input.
7.3.2.7 Power for PCS-9705A

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Power”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-10 Parameters description of “Power”of PCS-9705A
1 Pa_Sec
2 Pb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase active power.
3 Pc_Sec
4 Qa_Sec
5 Qb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase reactive power.
6 Qc_Sec
7 Sa_Sec
8 Sb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase apparent power.
9 Sc_Sec
10 Cosa
11 Cosb Three-phase power factors.
12 Cosc
13 P_Sec The secondary value of active power.
14 Q_Sec The secondary value of reactive power.
Date: 2011-08-05
15 S_Sec The secondary value of apparent power.
16 Cos Power factor
7.3.2.8 Frequency for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Frequency”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-11 Parameters description of “Frequency”of PCS-9705B
1 f_Grp1 The frequency of the 1st group voltage input.
2 f_Grp2 The frequency of the 2nd group voltage input.
3 f_Grp3 The frequency of the 3rd group voltage input.
4 f_Grp4 The frequency of the 4th group voltage input.
7.3.2.9 Line_Data for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Line_Data”in PCS-9705C.
Note! In the following table, all the values refer to the primary/secondary values of circuit
current values in 1½ CB arrangement.
In 1½ CB arrangement, the circuit current values are calculated by the vector summation of
the measured values of the 2 circuit breakers (Side CB and Center CB).
Table 7.3-12 Parameters description of “Line_Data”of PCS-9705C
1 Line_Ia_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase currents of the circuit in 1½ CB
2 Line_Ib_Sec
arrangement.
3 Line_Ic_Sec
4 Line_Pa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase active power of the circuit in 1½
5 Line_Pb_Sec
CB arrangement.
6 Line_Pc_Sec
7 Line_Qa_Sec
The secondary values of three-phase reactive power of the circuit in 1½
8 Line_Qb_Sec
CB arrangement.
9 Line_Qc_Sec
The secondary value of the active power of the circuit in 1 ½ CB

10 Line_P_Sec
arrangement.
The secondary value of the reactive power of the circuit in 1½ CB

11 Line_Q_Sec
arrangement.
Date: 2011-08-05
12 Line_Cosa
13 Line_Cosb Three-phase power factors of the circuit in 1½ CB arrangement.
14 Line_Cosc
15 Line_Cos Power factor of the circuit in 1½ CB arrangement.
16 Line_Ia_Pri
The primary values of three-phase currents of the circuit in 1½ CB
17 Line_Ib_Pri
arrangement.
18 Line_Ic_Pri
The primary value of the active power of the circuit in 1 ½ CB

19 Line_P_Pri
arrangement.
The primary value of the reactive power of the circuit in 1½ CB

20 Line_Q_Pri
arrangement.
21 Line_Pa_Pri
The primary values of three-phase active power of the circuit in 1½ CB
22 Line_Pb_Pri
arrangement.
23 Line_Pc_Pri
24 Line_Qa_Pri
The primary values of three-phase reactive power of the circuit in 1½ CB
25 Line_Qb_Pri
arrangement.
26 Line_Qc_Pri
7.3.2.10 BaseData1 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“BaseData1”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
Table 7.3-13 Parameters description of “BaseData1”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_Ia_Sec
2 Line1_Ib_Sec The secondary values of three-phase currents of the 1st CB.
3 Line1_Ic_Sec
4 Line1_Ua_Sec The secondary values of three-phase voltages of the 1st CB.
5 Line1_Ub_Sec
Date: 2011-08-05
6 Line1_Uc_Sec
The secondary value of the incoming voltage for the 1st CB

7 Line1_Usyn_Sec
synchronism-check.
8 Line1_Uab_Sec
9 Line1_Ubc_Sec The secondary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 1st CB.
10 Line1_Uca_Sec
11 Line1_U1_Sec The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 1st CB.
12 Line1_U2_Sec The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 1st CB.
13 Line1_3I0Cal_Sec Line1_Ia _Sec, Line1_I b_Sec and Line1_I c_Sec (i.e. Line1_3 I0Cal_Sec =
Line1_Ia _Sec + Line1_I b_Sec + Line1_I c_Sec).
14 Line1_3U0Cal_Sec of Line1_U a_Sec, Line1_U b_Sec and Line1_U c_Sec (i.e.

Line1_3U0Cal_Sec= Line1_ Ua_Sec + Line1_U b_Sec + Line1_Uc_Sec).

15 Line1_f
synchronism-check for closing the 1st CB.

16 Line1_fsyn
synchronism-check for closing the 1st CB.
17 Line1_P_Sec The secondary value of the active power of the 1st CB.
18 Line1_Q_Sec The secondary value of the reactive power of the 1st CB.
19 Line1_S_Sec The secondary value of the apparent power of the 1st CB.
20 Line1_Cos Power factor of the 1st CB.
7.3.2.11 PowerData1 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“PowerData1”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
Table 7.3-14 Parameters description of “PowerData1”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_Pa_Sec The secondary values of three-phase active power of the 1st CB.
Date: 2011-08-05
2 Line1_Pb_Sec
3 Line1_Pc_Sec
4 Line1_Qa_Sec
5 Line1_Qb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase reactive power of the 1st CB.
6 Line1_Qc_Sec
7 Line1_Sa_Sec
8 Line1_Sb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase apparent power of the 1st CB.
9 Line1_Sc_Sec
10 Line1_Cosa
11 Line1_Cosb Three-phase power factors of the 1st CB.
12 Line1_Cosc
13 Line1_P_Sec The secondary value of the active power of the 1st CB.
14 Line1_Q_Sec The secondary value of the reactive power of the 1st CB.
15 Line1_S_Sec The secondary value of the apparent power of the 1st CB.
16 Line1_Cos Power factor of the 1st CB.
7.3.2.12 BaseData2 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“BaseData2”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.

Table 7.3-15 Parameters description of “BaseData2”of PCS-9705C
Pin “13”and “14”on the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705C are used to

receive independent external current input.
The primary value of the Independent external current is displayed as
1 IL_Sec “IL_Pri” in the submenu

The secondary value of the independent external current is displayed as
“IL_Sec”in the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“BaseData2”.
2 Line2_Ia_Sec The secondary values of three-phase currents of the 2nd CB.
Date: 2011-08-05
3 Line2_Ib_Sec
4 Line2_Ic_Sec
5 Line2_Ua_Sec
6 Line2_Ub_Sec The secondary values of three-phase voltages of the 2nd CB.
7 Line2_Uc_Sec
The secondary value of the incoming voltage for the 2nd CB

8 Line2_Usyn_Sec
synchronism-check.
9 Line2_Uab_Sec
10 Line2_Ubc_Sec The secondary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 2nd CB.
11 Line2_Uca_Sec
12 Line2_U1_Sec The secondary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 2nd CB.
13 Line2_U2_Sec The secondary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 2nd CB.
14 Line2_3I0Cal_Sec Line2_Ia _Sec, Line2_I b_Sec and Line2_I c_Sec (i.e. Line2_3I0Cal_Sec =
Line2_Ia _Sec + Line2_I b_Sec + Line2_I c_Sec).
15 Line2_3U0Cal_Sec of Line2_U a_Sec, Line2_U b_Sec and Line2_U c_Sec (i.e.

Line2_3U0Cal_Sec= Line2_ Ua_Sec + Line2_U b_Sec + Line2_Uc_Sec).

16 Line2_f
synchronism-check for closing the 2nd CB.

17 Line2_fsyn
synchronism-check for closing the 2nd CB.
18 Line2_P_Sec The secondary value of the active power of the 2nd CB.
19 Line2_Q_Sec The secondary value of the reactive power of the 2nd CB.
20 Line2_S_Sec The secondary value of the apparent power of the 2nd CB.
21 Line2_Cos Power factor of the 2nd CB.
7.3.2.13 PowerData2 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“PowerData2”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.

Date: 2011-08-05
Table 7.3-16 Parameters description of “PowerData2”of PCS-9705C
1 Line2_Pa_Sec
2 Line2_Pb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase active power of the 2nd CB.
3 Line2_Pc_Sec
4 Line2_Qa_Sec
5 Line2_Qb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase reactive power of the 2nd CB.
6 Line2_Qc_Sec
7 Line2_Sa_Sec
8 Line2_Sb_Sec The secondary values of three-phase apparent power of the 2nd CB.
9 Line2_Sc_Sec
10 Line2_Cosa
11 Line2_Cosb Three-phase power factors of the 2nd CB.
12 Line2_Cosc
13 Line2_P_Sec The secondary value of the active power of the 2nd CB.
14 Line2_Q_Sec The secondary value of the reactive power of the 2nd CB.
15 Line2_S_Sec The secondary value of the apparent power of the 2nd CB.
16 Line2_Cos Power factor of the 2nd CB.
7.3.2.14 Harmonics for PCS-9705A

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Harmonics”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-17 Parameters description of “Harmonics”of PCS-9705A
1 U1stH The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage.
2 U3rdH The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage.
3 U5thH The secondary value of the 5th harmonic voltage.
7.3.2.15 Harmonics1 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Harmonics1”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-18 Parameters description of “Harmonics1”of PCS-9705B
Date: 2011-08-05
The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 1st group voltage
1 U1stH_Grp1
input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 1st group
2 U3rdH_Grp1
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 5th harmonic voltage of the 1st group voltage
3 U5thH_Grp1
input.
4 U7thH_Grp1
input.
5 U9thH_Grp1
input.
The secondary value of the 11th harmonic voltage of the 1st group
6 U11thH_Grp1
voltage input.
7 U13thH_Grp1
voltage input.
8 U15thH_Grp1
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 2nd group
9 U1stH_Grp2
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 2nd group
10 U3rdH_Grp2
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 5th harmonic voltage of the 2nd group
11 U5thH_Grp2
voltage input.
12 U7thH_Grp2
voltage input.
13 U9thH_Grp2
voltage input.
14 U11thH_Grp2
voltage input.
15 U13thH_Grp2
voltage input.
16 U15thH_Grp2
voltage input.
7.3.2.16 Harmonics2 for PCS-9705B

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Harmonics2”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-19 Parameters description of “Harmonics2”of PCS-9705B
Date: 2011-08-05
The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 3rd group
1 U1stH_Grp3
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 3rd group
2 U3rdH_Grp3
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 5th harmonic voltage of the 3rd group
3 U5thH_Grp3
voltage input.
4 U7thH_Grp3
voltage input.
5 U9thH_Grp3
voltage input.
6 U11thH_Grp3
voltage input.
7 U13thH_Grp3
voltage input.
8 U15thH_Grp3
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 4th group voltage
9 U1stH_Grp4
input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 4th group
10 U3rdH_Grp4
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 5th harmonic voltage of the 4th group
11 U5thH_Grp4
voltage input.
12 U7thH_Grp4
voltage input.
13 U9thH_Grp4
voltage input.
14 U11thH_Grp4
voltage input.
15 U13thH_Grp4
voltage input.
16 U15thH_Grp4
voltage input.
7.3.2.17 Harmonics1 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Harmonics1”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
Date: 2011-08-05
2) Center CB.
“the 1st group voltage input”mainly refers to the voltage input of the 1st CB in 1½
CB arrangement, it can be the Center CB or the Side CB.
Table 7.3-20 Parameters description of “Harmonics1”of PCS-9705C
The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 1st group voltage
1 Line1_U1stH
input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 1st group
2 Line1_U3rdH
voltage input.
3 Line1_U5thH
input.
4 Line1_U7thH
input.
5 Line1_U9thH
input.
6 Line1_U11thH
voltage input.
7 Line1_U13thH
voltage input.
8 Line1_U15thH
voltage input.
7.3.2.18 Harmonics2 for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Harmonics2”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.
“the 2nd group voltage input”mainly refers to the voltage input of the 2nd CB in 1½
CB arrangement, it can be the Center CB or the Side CB.
Table 7.3-21 Parameters description of “Harmonics2”of PCS-9705C
1 Line2_U1stH The secondary value of the 1st harmonic voltage of the 2nd group
Date: 2011-08-05
voltage input.
The secondary value of the 3rd harmonic voltage of the 2nd group
2 Line2_U3rdH
voltage input.
3 Line2_U5thH
voltage input.
4 Line2_U7thH
voltage input.
5 Line2_U9thH
voltage input.
6 Line2_U11thH
voltage input.
7 Line2_U13thH
voltage input.
8 Line2_U15thH
voltage input.
7.3.2.19 Primary_Values for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Primary_Values”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.

Table 7.3-22 Parameters description of “Primary_Values”of PCS-9705C
1 Line1_Ia_Pri
2 Line1_Ib_Pri The primary values of three-phase currents of the 1st CB.
3 Line1_Ic_Pri
4 Line1_Ua_Pri
5 Line1_Ub_Pri The primary values of three-phase voltages of the 1st CB.
6 Line1_Uc_Pri
7 Line1_Uab_Pri The primary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 1st CB.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Line1_Ubc_Pri
9 Line1_Uca_Pri
10 Line1_U1_Pri The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 1st CB.
11 Line1_U2_Pri The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 1st CB.
The primary value of the incoming voltage for the 1st CB

12 Line1_Usyn_Pri
synchronism-check.
13 Line1_P_Pri The primary value of the active power of the 1st CB.
14 Line1_Q_Pri The primary value of the reactive power of the 1st CB.
15 Line1_S_Pri The primary value of the apparent power of the 1st CB.
16 Line2_Ia_Pri
17 Line2_Ib_Pri The primary values of three-phase currents of the 2nd CB.
18 Line2_Ic_Pri
19 Line2_Ua_Pri
20 Line2_Ub_Pri The primary values of three-phase voltages of the 2nd CB.
21 Line2_Uc_Pri
22 Line2_Uab_Pri
23 Line2_Ubc_Pri The primary values of 3 phase-to-phase voltages of the 2nd CB.
24 Line2_Uca_Pri
25 Line2_U1_Pri The primary value of the positive-sequence voltage of the 2nd CB.
26 Line2_U2_Pri The primary value of the negative-sequence voltage of the 2nd CB.
The primary value of the incoming voltage for the 2nd CB

27 Line2_Usyn_Pri
synchronism-check.
28 Line2_P_Pri The primary value of the active power of the 2nd CB.
29 Line2_Q_Pri The primary value of the reactive power of the 2nd CB.
30 Line2_S_Pri The primary value of the apparent power of the 2nd CB.
Pin “13”and “14”on the AI(AC) module of PCS-9705C are used to

receive independent external current input.
The primary value of the Independent external current is displayed as
31 IL_Pri “IL_Pri” in the submenu

The secondary value of the independent external current is displayed as
“IL_Sec”in the submenu “Analog”->“Measurements”->“BaseData2”.
7.3.2.20 Synchrocheck for PCS-9705A

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Synchrocheck”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-23 Parameters description of “Synchrocheck”of PCS-9705A
Date: 2011-08-05
Phase-angle difference between reference side and incoming side for

1 phi_Diff
CB synchronism-check.
The frequency difference between reference side and incoming side for
2 f_Diff
CB synchronism-check.
The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for CB
3 df/dt
synchronism-check.
The secondary voltage difference between reference side and incoming

4 U_Diff_Sec
side for CB synchronism-check.
5 U_Diff_Pri It is the corresponding primary value of [U_Diff_Sec].
7.3.2.21 Synchrocheck for PCS-9705C

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Synchrocheck”in PCS-9705C.
1) Side CB;
2) Center CB.

Table 7.3-24 Parameters description of “Synchrocheck”of PCS-9705C

1 Line1_phi_Diff
the 1st CB synchronism-check.
2 Line1_f_Diff
the 1st CB synchronism-check.
The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for the
3 Line1_df/dt
1st CB synchronism-check.

4 Line1_U_Diff_Sec
side for the 1st CB synchronism-check.

5 Line2_phi_Diff
the 2nd CB synchronism-check.
6 Line2_f_Diff
the 2nd CB synchronism-check.
Date: 2011-08-05
The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for the
7 Line2_df/dt
2nd CB synchronism-check.

8 Line2_U_Diff_Sec
side for the 2nd CB synchronism-check.
7.3.2.22 DC_Input_Pri_Val for PCS-9705A/B/C
The following 2 tables show the parameters description of the submenu

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“DC_Input_Pri_Val”in PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-25 Parameters description of “DC_Input_Pri_Val”of PCS-9705A/B/C with 8 DC analog inputs
The primary value of the No.1 DC analog inputs on the AI(DC) module
1 PriVal_dcmA01
on slot B11.
2 PriVal_dcmA02
on slot B11.
3 PriVal_dcmA03
on slot B11.
4 PriVal_dcmA04
on slot B11.
5 PriVal_dcmA05
on slot B11.
6 PriVal_dcmA06
on slot B11.
7 PriVal_dcmA07
on slot B11.
8 PriVal_dcmA08
on slot B11.
Table 7.3-26 Parameters description of “DC_Input_Pri_Val”of PCS-9705A/B/C with 16 DC analog inputs
1 PriVal_dcmA01
on slot B11.
2 PriVal_dcmA02
on slot B11.
3 PriVal_dcmA03
on slot B11.
4 PriVal_dcmA04 The primary value of the No.4 DC analog inputs on the AI(DC) module
Date: 2011-08-05
on slot B11.
5 PriVal_dcmA05
on slot B11.
6 PriVal_dcmA06
on slot B11.
7 PriVal_dcmA07
on slot B11.
8 PriVal_dcmA08
on slot B11.
9 PriVal_dcmA09
on slot B10.
10 PriVal_dcmA10
on slot B10.
11 PriVal_dcmA11
on slot B10.
12 PriVal_dcmA12
on slot B10.
13 PriVal_dcmA13
on slot B10.
14 PriVal_dcmA14
on slot B10.
15 PriVal_dcmA15
on slot B10.
16 PriVal_dcmA16
on slot B10.
7.3.2.23 DC_Input_Sec_Val for PCS-9705A/B/C
The following 2 tables show the parameters description of the submenu

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“DC_Input_Sec_Val”in PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-27 Parameters description of “DC_Input_Sec_Val”of PCS-9705A/B/C with 8 DC analog inputs
The secondary value of the No.1 DC analog inputs on the AI(DC)

1 SecVal_dcmA01
module.

2 SecVal_dcmA02
module.
Date: 2011-08-05

3 SecVal_dcmA03
module.

4 SecVal_dcmA04
module.

5 SecVal_dcmA05
module.

6 SecVal_dcmA06
module.

7 SecVal_dcmA07
module.

8 SecVal_dcmA08
module.
Table 7.3-28 Parameters description of “DC_Input_Sec_Val”of PCS-9705A/B/C with 16 DC analog inputs
The secondary value of the No.1 DC analog inputs on the AI(DC) module
1 SecVal_dcmA01
on slot B11.
2 SecVal_dcmA02
on slot B11.
3 SecVal_dcmA03
on slot B11.
4 SecVal_dcmA04
on slot B11.
5 SecVal_dcmA05
on slot B11.
6 SecVal_dcmA06
on slot B11.
7 SecVal_dcmA07
on slot B11.
8 SecVal_dcmA08
on slot B11.
9 SecVal_dcmA09
on slot B10.
10 SecVal_dcmA10
on slot B10.
11 SecVal_dcmA11
on slot B10.
12 SecVal_dcmA12
on slot B10.
13 SecVal_dcmA13 The secondary value of the No.5 DC analog inputs on the AI(DC) module
Date: 2011-08-05
on slot B10.
14 SecVal_dcmA14
on slot B10.
15 SecVal_dcmA15
on slot B10.
16 SecVal_dcmA16
on slot B10.
7.3.2.24 GOOSE_Analog for PCS-9705A/B/C
Note! This submenu is only valid in the PCS-9705 which adopts GOOSE analog sampling
via GOOSE module or NET-DSP module.

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“GOOSE_Analog”in PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-29 Parameters description of “GOOSE_Analog”of PCS-9705A/B/C
The original sampled value of the No. XX analog input received by the
1 GAI_XX
GOOSE module.
Note! In the above table:
For PCS-9705A, XX=1,2… ,32;
For PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C, XX=1,2… ,16.
7.3.2.25 Regulation_Outputs for PCS-9705B
Note! This submenu is only valid in the PCS-9705B which sends DC voltage/current
output to DCS system to regulate the active power output of the specified generator via
AO module.

“Analog”->“Measurements”->“Regulation_Outputs”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-30 Parameters description of “Regulation_Outputs”of PCS-9705B
1 Output_Regu1 The value of the No.1 DC voltage/current outputs via AO module.
Date: 2011-08-05
7.3.3 Status
This menu is mainly used to display the state of binary inputs (including binary inputs via
opto-coupler and GOOSE binary inputs) and alarm signals in the device. This menu and “Analog”
menu fully reflects the running environment of the device. As long as the displayed values consist
with the actual running situation, basically, the device can work normally. This menu is set to
greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on site.
Locate the cursor on “Status”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key to
access the submenus.
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Status”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-31 Submenus description of “Status”of PCS-9705A
No. Item Description
Display all binary input states.

1 Inputs Please refer to the Section “Hardware”->“BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504)
on Slot B04~B09”and the “GOOSE Function Manual”for more details.
2 Outputs Display all binary output states.
Display supervision alarm states. Please refer to the Chapter “Supervision”

3 Superv_State
for more details.
4 AR_Sig Reserved signals for auto-reclosing function.
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Status”in PCS-9705B/C.
Table 7.3-32 Submenus description of “Status”of PCS-9705B/C
Display all binary input states.

1 Inputs Please refer to the Section “Hardware”->“BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504)
on Slot B04~B09”and the “GOOSE Function Manual”for more details.
2 Outputs Display all binary output states.
Display supervision alarm states. Please refer to the Chapter “Supervision”

3 Superv_State
for more details.
The details of the submenu “Status”in PCS-9705A/B/C is introduced in the following 3 sections.
7.3.3.1 Inputs for PCS-9705A/B/C
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Status”->“Inputs” in
PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-33 Submenus description of “Inputs”of PCS-9705A/B/C
Display the states of binary input derived from opto-isolated channels.

1 Contact_Inputs
Please refer to the Section “Hardware”->“BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504)
Date: 2011-08-05
on Slot B04~B09”for more details.
Display the states of GOOSE binary inputs.

2 GOOSE_Inputs
Please refer to the “GOOSE Function Manual”for more details.
7.3.3.2 Outputs for PCS-9705A
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Status”->“Outputs” in
PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-34 Submenus description of “Outputs”of PCS-9705A
Display the states of GOOSE binary outputs.

1 GOOSE_Outputs
Ple ase refer to the “GOOSE Function Manual”for more details.
Display the tap position of transformer.
2 Tap_Position NOTE: The submenu “Tap_Position” does not exist in
PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C.
26 signals to indicate the interlock result state of each telecontrol are listed
in this submenu :
[Sig_En_CtrlTrp01]… [Sig_En_CtrlTrp13];
[Sig_En_CtrlCls01]… [Sig_En_CtrlCls13].
The items in this submenu are applied together with [En_Trpn_Blk] and
[En_ClsXX_Blk] in the submenu “Settings”->“Interlock_Settings”.
(XX=01~13)
When the [En_TrpXX_Blk]=“1”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is
controlled by the interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) If the interlocking conditions
are met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=1), tripping output XX has output,
3 Interlock_Status otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=0) tripping output XX has no output.
When the [En_Trpn_Blk]=“0”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is not
controlled by the interlocking logic. (XX=01~13) Whether the interlocking
When the [En_Clsn_Blk]=“1”: Closing output XX of the BO module is
are met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=1), closing output XX has output,
otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=0) closing output XX has no output.
When the [En_Clsn_Blk]=“0”: Closing output XX of the BO module is not
7.3.3.3 Outputs for PCS-9705B/C
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Status”->“Outputs” in
PCS-9705B/C.
Date: 2011-08-05
Table 7.3-35 Submenus description of “Outputs”of PCS-9705B/C
26 signals to indicate the interlock result state of each telecontrol are listed
in this submenu :
[Sig_En_CtrlTrp01]… [Sig_En_CtrlTrp13];
[Sig_En_CtrlCls01]… [Sig_En_CtrlCls13].
The items in this submenu are applied together with [En_TrpXX_Blk] and
[En_Cl sXX_Blk] in the submenu “Settings”->“Interlock_Settings”.
(XX=01~13)
When the [En_TrpXX_Blk]=“1”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is
are met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=1), tripping output XX has output,
1 Interlock_Status otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlTrpXX]=0) tripping output XX has no output.
When the [En_TrpXX_Blk]=“0”: Tripping output XX of the BO module is not
When the [En_ClsXX_Blk]=“1”: Closing output XX of the BO module is
are met (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=1), closing output XX has output,
otherwise (i.e.: [Sig_En_CtrlClsXX]=0) closing output XX has no output.
When the [En_ClsXX_Blk]=“0”: Closing output XX of the BO module is not
7.3.3.4 Superv_State for PCS-9705A/B/C
Please refer to the Chapter “Supervision”for more details.
7.3.4 Records
This menu is used for displaying all kinds of records, so that the operator can load to view and use
as the reference of analyzing accidents and maintaining the device. All the records are stored in
non-volatile memory, it can still record the reports even if it losses its power.
Locate the cursor on “Records”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key to
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Records”in PCS-9705A.
Table 7.3-36 Submenus description of “Records”of PCS-9705A
No. Item Function description
2 kinds of records are displayed in this submenu:

[Tap_Slide_Trip] If it is “1”, it indicates that the device is sending out a
1 Disturb_Records tripping command to terminate the transformer tap position sliding.
[BO_AR]: If it is “1”, it indicates that the device is sending out an
auto-reclosing command if auto-reclosing function is supported. (Only for
Date: 2011-08-05
PCS-9705A).
When the total number in this submenu reaches 64, “Disturb_Records”
memory area will be full. If a new item is issued now, the item will be
deleted, and then the latest item will be stored.
The self supervision records (i.e.:state changing events of any item of

“Status”->“Superv_State”) are displayed in this menu.
When the total number of self supervision records reaches 1024,
2 Superv_Events “Superv_Events” memory area will be full. If a new self supervision
information is issued now, the oldest control command record will be
deleted, and then the latest control command record will be stored and
displayed.
The SOE state changes records of this device are displayed in this menu.
When the total number of SOE state change records reaches 1024,
3 IO_Events “IO_Events”memory area will be full. If the device receives a new SOE
state change now, the oldest SOE state change record will be deleted, and
then the latest SOE state change record will be stored and displayed.
The running/operation reports of this device are displayed in this menu.

3 types of device logs are displayed in this submenu in the sequence of the
modification :
“Report_Cleared”;
“Reboot”;
4 Device_Logs “Settings_Chgd”.
When the total number of running/operation reports reaches 1024,
“Device_Logs” memory area will be full. If the device receives a new
running/operation report now, the oldest running/operation report will be
deleted, and then the latest running/operation report will be stored and
displayed.
The control commands records of this device are displayed in this menu.
When the total number of control command records reaches 256,
5 Control_Logs “Control_Logs” memory area will be full. If the device receives a new
control command now, the oldest control command record will be deleted,
and then the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.
6 Clear_Records Clear all the records in the menu “Records”.
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Records”in PCS-9705B.
Table 7.3-37 Submenus description of “Records”of PCS-9705B

1 Superv_Events
When the total number of self supervision records reaches 1024,
“Superv_Events” memory area will be full. If a new self supervision
Date: 2011-08-05

displayed.

modification:
“Reboot”;
displayed.
The regulation commands records of this device are displayed in this menu.
When the total number of regulation command records reaches 256,
“Regulation_Logs”memory area will be full. If the device receives a new
5 Regulation_Logs control command now, the oldest control command record will be deleted,
and the n the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.
Please refer to the Section “Operation Theory”->“Regulation”for more
details.
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Records”in PCS-9705C.
Table 7.3-38 Submenus description of “Records”of PCS-9705C

1 Superv_Events When the total number of self supervision records reaches 1024,
“Superv_Events” memory area will be full. If a new self supervision
Date: 2011-08-05
displayed.

modification :
“Reboot”;
displayed.
7.3.5 Settings
This menu is mainly used for viewing and modifying the parameter and settings of the device.
Locate the cursor on “Settings”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key to
The password is “111”.
Please refer to the Chapter “Settings”for more details of the menu “Settings”.
7.3.6 Local_Cmd
Locate the cursor on “Local_Cmd”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key
to access the submenus.
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Local_Cmd” in
PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-39 Submenus description of “Local_Cmd”of PCS-9705A/B/C
Date: 2011-08-05
After accessing this submenu, the device will issue the request for
downloading files.
Now this device can receives files (e.g.:Interlocking configuration files,
1 Download
GOOSE configuration files) from outside computers.
This device will fail to receive files from outside computers after exiting
this menu.
2 Clear_Interlock_File Clear all the interlocking files of this device.
Clear all the statistic data in the all the 4 submenus in the menu “Test”:
1) “AR_Counter” if auto-reclosing function is supported. (Only for
3 Clear_Statistics
PCS-9705A)
2) “CBTrip_Counter”
In this submenu, any of the binary outputs on the BO modules can be

4 Manual_Control
operated manually to trip, close output or for signaling purpose.
Note! This submenu only exists in PCS-9705B.
5 Manual_Regulation
In this submenu, any of the analog output on the AO modules can be
operated manually to regulate the active power output of the specified
generator.
Note! Correct password must be inputted to access the submenus “Clear_Interlock_File”,
“Clear_Statistics”, “Manual_Control ” and “Manual_Regulation ”. The password is

“111”.
7.3.7 Information
Locate the cursor on “Information”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key
to access the submenu “Version_Info”.
Locate the cursor on “Version_Info”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key
to access the version information inrerface.
The submenu “Information”->“Version_Info”is applied to display the software information of

CPU module which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes.
The following figure shows the display of the submenu “Information”->“Version_Info” of

PCS-9705A. The display of PCS-9705B and PCS-9705C is similar.
Date: 2011-08-05
Figure 7.3-4 “Version_Info”display of PCS-9705A
Note! It’
s only a sample which is used to explain the indication of the software version
menu. The software version of the device of the practical engineering should be taken as
final and binding.
7.3.8 Test
Locate the cursor on “Test”by turning the knob of the “MENU”and press the “MENU”key to
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Test”in PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-40 Description of “Test”submenus of PCS-9705A/B/C
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to

1 Comm_Test SCADA (i.e.: HMI system), please refer to the Section
“Test”->“Comm_Test for PCS-9705A/B/C”for more details.
2 Force_Measurement Simulate and issue analog values to SCADA system.
16 signals to indicate virtual binary input states generated by

calculation of this device are listed in this submenu:
3 Internal_Signal [Sig_DP0 1]… [Sig_DP16].
Each signal corresponds to a virtual double point binary input
synthesized from 2 single point binary inputs by this device.
Date: 2011-08-05
This menu consists of the parameters to adjust the accuracy of

AC analog input automatically.
Note! The function is used to maintain this device and

4 AC_Auto_Calibration
has already been set by the manufacturer. It is
strongly recommended that the users not to adjust
it.

DC analog inpu t automatically.

5 DC_Auto_Calibration
it.

DC zero drift automatically.

6 DC_Zero_Adjust
it.
7 GOOSE_Comm_Counter View communication statistics data of GOOSE communication.
View communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)

8 SV_Comm_Counter
communication.
Now there is only 1 item [N_TripCB] in this submenu.

9 CBTrip_Counter [N_TripCB] is used for counting tripping times of the circuit
breaker.
Show the real-time status of interlocking information, please

10 Interlock_Info refer to the Section “Test”->“Interlock_Info for
PCS-9705A/B/C”for more details.
Note! Correct password must be inputted to access the submenus “Comm_Test” and
“Force_Measurement”. The password is “111”.
The following sections will introduce the submenu “Comm_Test”, “Interlock_Info”in details.
7.3.8.1 Comm_Test for PCS-9705A/B/C
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Test”->“Comm_Test”in
PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-41 Submenus description of “Comm_Test”of PCS-9705A/B/C
Date: 2011-08-05
After accessing this submenu, the device will start to test every
1 All Test
item in “Trip_Test”, “Alarm_Test”, “Binary_Test”automatically.
This submenu is used for testing “Tap_Slide_Trip” and

2 Trip Test
“BO_AR”in PCS-9705A.
This submenu is used for testing the items in the submenu

3 Alarm Test
“Status”->“Superv_State”.
This submenu is used for testing the items in the submenu

“Status”->“Inputs” ->“Contact_Inputs”, the submenu
4 BinChange Test “Status”->“Inputs” ->“GOOSE_Inputs” and the submenu

“Settings”->“Function_Links”. [GBI_SOE_XXX]
(XXX=001,002… 200) can also be tested in this submenu.
7.3.8.2 Interlock_Info for PCS-9705A/B/C
The following table shows the submenus description of the submenu “Test”->“Interlock_Info”in
PCS-9705A/B/C.
Table 7.3-42 Submenus description of “Interlock_Info”of PCS-9705A/B/C
Show the real-time status of interlocking information received

by GOOSE.
1 GOOSE_Interlock
Note! If this device does not have GOOSE interlocking
function, this menu will disappear.
Show the real-time status of IEC103 interlocking information.
2 IEC103_Interlock Note! If this device does not have IEC103
interlocking function, this menu will disappear.
7.3.9 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
Note! Generally speaking, this device can automatically receive the clock synchronization
signal and to ensure the accuracy of the internal clock of this device, so it is unnecessary
to use this submenu to adjust time.
7.3.10 Language
This menu is mainly used for setting LCD display language of this device.
1: Chinese
2: English.
Date: 2011-08-05
The following figure shows the “Language”display of this device.
Please Select Language:
1.
2.English
Figure 7.3-5 “Language”display of this device
Note! The LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be
some different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual device.
Date: 2011-08-05
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
8 Communication
8.1 General
This section outlines the remote data communication interfaces of this device. It should be noted
that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the protocol itself. The
relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this information. This section
serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in this device.
8.2 Ethernet Port Information

This device provides 2 or 4 rear Ethernet interfaces and they are unattached to each other.
Parameters of all the Ethernet ports can be configured in the menu “Comm_Settings”.
8.2.1 IP Address and Equipment Address of the Equipment

A brief explanation of IP and network submask is made as bellow. There are four sections for an
IP address.
xxx.xxx.xxx. xxx
Section 3
Section 2
Section 1
Section 0
Figure 8.2-1 Format of IP address
Where:
 Section 3 and section 2 can be set separately
 Section 1 * 256 + section 0 = equipment address
Equipment address has above relationship described as an equation with section 1 and section 0
of IP address.
8.2.2 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A
picture is shown bellow.
Figure 8.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
8.2.3 Connections and Toplogies

Each equipment is connected to an Ethernet switch via communication cable and thereby to form
a star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the Ethernet switch and will play a role of master station; therefore every
equipment which has been connected to the Ethernet switch will play a role of slave unit.
Figure 8.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
8.3 SCADA Communication

8.3.1 Overview
This device can be connected to a SCADA through networks by using the IEC60870-5-103
protocol.
8.3.2 SCADA Common Functionality

This paragraph describes the data exchange between the “SCADA communication”function and
the Master SCADA. It is split into two sub-paragraphs:
 Inputs: data received from SCADA.
 Outputs: data sent from the “SCADA communication”function to SCADA.
8.3.3 Behavior and Specific Treatments
Note! In subsequent paragraphs, the master station (e.g.: SCADA) is referred to as the
controlling station.
8.3.3.1 Initialization
There is a running database for each SCADA link. At initialization, a GI is performed on the
application in order to initialize these databases.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
The GI sequence consists of different requests to this device application in order to get the value
and state of all data (binary input, measurement, counter, step position indication).
8.3.3.2 General Interrogation
The Outstation Interrogation function is used for updating the controlling station after initialization
procedure of the internal station, or when the controlling station detects loss of information, or
when the link layer connection has been re-established. The general interrogation function of the
controlling station requests this device to transmit the actual values of all addressed datapoints.
This device marks the end of the general interrogation procedure by sending an indication to the
controlling station when the protocols allow it.
8.3.3.3 Clock Synchronization
Clock in this device may be synchronized by the Controlling station.
The controlling station must continue to send correct clock synchronization commands.
8.3.3.4 Local/Remote Control Mode
A bay can be in Local Control Mode or Remote Control Mode. When it is in Local Control
Mode it can not be controlled remotely and when it is in Remote Control Mode, it can not be
controlled locally.
The mode switching is associated with a binary input 3 named [BI_Rmt/Loc] on the PWR board.
Please refer to the Section “Operation Theory”->“Binary Input”for details.
8.3.4 Data Sent to SCADA

After the initialization sequence, this device Slave sends the state of all its data to the SCADA.
The current state of data is sent as state or as change of state messages depending on the
protocol.
The data, which can be sent to SCADA, is detailed in the paragraphs below.
8.3.4.1 Binary Inputs
Binary inputs can be sent as states or as changes of state depending on the protocol. A binary
input can be associated with a single point or a double point. Multipoint status is not treated.
8.3.4.2 Measurements
Measurements can be sent as periodical messages or as changes of state: variation, threshold,

and invalidity.
8.3.4.3 Tap Position
Tap position indication (TPI) can be sent to SCADA.
8.3.4.4 Synchronization Status
This device can inform SCADA/RTU about its synchronization status.
According to the protocol, this may be done by a specific message or by a binary input.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
8.3.5 Data Sent to this Device

SCADA can send data to this device. The type of data is described in subsequent paragraphs.
8.3.5.1 Digital Controls
A control is transmitted to handling of control sequence function. At the end of the control
sequence an acknowledgement is sent to SCADA if protocol allows it.
8.3.5.2 Synchronization
Depending on the configuration, this device can be synchronized by a SCADA.
8.4 IEC61850 Interface
8.4.1 Overview
The IEC61850 software module is adopted in the device.
The IEC61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC61850-2: Glossary
IEC61850-3: General requirements
IEC61850-4: System and project management
IEC61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations
related to IEDs
IEC61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment -
Principles and models
IEC61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Common data classes
IEC61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
IEC61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multi-drop point to point link
IEC61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
IEC61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC61850 implementation obtain this document set.
8.4.2 Communication Profiles
This device supports IEC61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol stacks. The
TCP/IP profile requires this device to have an IP address to establish communications. These
addresses are located in the submenu “Comm_Settings”. See Section
“Settings”->“Comm_Settings”for further details.
1） MMS protocol
IEC61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC61850 abstract services in
IEC61850-8-1.
2） Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection and communication activity

is initiated and controlled by the client. Substation computers running HMI programs or SOE
logging software are considered as IEC61850 clients. Substation equipment such as protection
relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay control units are considered as servers.
Please note that RTUs can also be considered as clients.
3） Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, bay control units. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.
4） Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.
8.4.3 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical
device can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain
many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is
composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Se rvices are available at each level
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information
about the IED logical device.
8.4.3.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in this device to provide access to digital status points
(including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data
content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status points for
access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status values from
in this device. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting features available from GGIO in
order to build sequence of events (abbreviated SOE) logs and HMI display screens. Buffered
reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the
chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted to HMI
clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block (abbreviated
BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
8.4.3.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from an IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2
provides data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog
data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the
corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU.MX.TotW: three-phase active power

MMXU.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
MMXU.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
MMXU.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
8.4.3.3 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. In this device, most of the public services, the common
settings, control values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public
services may be BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole
device; the common settings (the logic nodes LPHD also contain some related common settings)
include all the setting items of communication settings , system settings and some of the setting
items, which can be configured to 2 or more logical nodes. In LLN0, the item Loc is a device
control object, this Do item indicates the local operation for complete logical device, when it is true,
all the remote control commands to the IED will be blocked and those commands make effective
until the item Loc is changed to false. Besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are
some other logical nodes below in the IEDs:
This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage
MMXU: and current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as
power flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The
requested accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
This LN shall be used to “enable”a switching operation if the interlocking conditions are
fulfilled. One instance per switching device is needed. At least all related switchgear
positions have to be subscribed. The interlocking algorithm is a local issue.
This LN is used for the interlocking function at station level and/or at bay level.
Interlocking may be totally centralized or totally decentralized. Since the interlocking

rules are basically the same on bay and station level and based on all related position
indications, the different interlocking LNs may be seen as instances of the same LN
class Interlocking (IL).
CILO:
1) Interlocking of switchgear at bay level
All interlocking rules referring to a bay are included in this LN. Releases or
blockings of requested commands are issued. In the case of status changes
affecting interlocking, blocking commands are issued.
2) Interlocking of switchgear at station level
All interlocking rules referring to the station are included in this LN. Releases
or blockings of requested commands are issued. Information with the LN bay
interlocking is exchanged.
This LN is used for the sequences and imbalances, for example for stability purpose.
MSQI: This LN is used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and to calculate the sequences and
imbalances in a three/multi-phase power system.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
This LN is used for synchrocheck/synchronizing or synchronism check.
The voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker is calculated and
compared with predefined switching conditions (synchrocheck). Included is the case
that one side is dead (example: energizing a dead line) and the case that the phasor on
one side can be actively controlled by “higher”or “lower”(means synchronising).
RSYN:
Synchronizing or synchronism-check device is a device that operates when two AC
circuits are within the desired limits of frequency, phase-angle and voltage, to permit or
to cause the paralleling of these two circuits (IEEE C37.2-1996).
To avoid stress for the switching device and the network, closing of the circuit breaker is
allowed by the synchrocheck only, if the differences of voltage, frequency and phase
angle are within certain limits.
This LN is used for tap changer.

YLTC:
Device allocated to YPTR allowing changing taps of the winding for voltage regulation.
This LN is used for automatic tap changer control.
ATCC: This LN provides automatic function to keep the voltage of a busbar within a specific
range using tap changers. This node operates the tap changer automatically according
to given setpoints or by direct operator commands (manual mode).
Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
LPHD:
device.
Generic automatic process control, it is used to model in a generic way the
GAPC: processing/automation of functions, for example the sequence control functions for this
device.
Switch controller. This class is used to control all switching conditions of XCBR and
CSWI: XSWI. A remote switching command (for example select-before-operate) arrives here
firstly.
Breaker control. The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control
XCBR:
feature.
This is the position of the breaker. If the breaker control logic
indicates that the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is
XCBR1.ST.Pos: closed, then the breaker position state is “on”. If the breaker
control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker
position state is “off”.
This is the state of the block open command logic. When true,
XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn:
breaker open commands from IEC61850 clients will be rejected.
This is the state of the block close command logic. When true,
XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: breaker close commands from IEC61850 clients will be
rejected.
This is where IEC61850 clients can issue open or close
commands to the breaker. Select Before Operate (abbreviated
XCBR1.CO.Pos:
SBO) with enhanced security is the only supported IEC61850
control model.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
8.4.4 Server Features and Configuration

8.4.4.1 Buffered/Unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values
(in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and
then be sent to the IED via an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by this device:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 2: Quality-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by this device:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
8.4.4.2 File Transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of event record or other files from this device.
8.4.4.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated (abbreviated UTC) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the latest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
8.4.4.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
 A five or six-character name prefix.
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
8.4.4.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block”to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link
settings in device.
This device supports IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-9705 series bay control units.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must
be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at
the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1) Configure the data.
2) Configure the transmission dataset.
3) Configure the GOOSE service settings.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1) Configure the data.
2) Configure the reception dataset.
3) Configure the GOOSE service settings.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
8.4.5 ACSI Conformance

8.4.5.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Table 8.4-1
Client / Server
Services PCS-9705
Subsrciber /Publisher
Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Note!
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
O: Optional.
Y: Supported by this device.
N: Currently not supported by this device.
8.4.5.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Table 8.4-2
Services Client/Subsrciber Server/Publisher PCS-9705
M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Services Client/Subsrciber Server/Publisher PCS-9705
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y Y
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Note!
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared .
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time
models has been declared.
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared.
M: Mandatory.
Y: Supported by this device.
N: Currently not supported by this device.
8.4.5.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Table 8.4-3
Services Server/Publisher PCS-9705
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O N
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M Y
S24-3 data-update M Y
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M Y
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M Y
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O Y
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
8.4.6 Logical Nodes Table
This device supports IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Table 8.4-4
Nodes PCS-9705
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent －
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning －
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function －
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure －
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator －
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing －
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking YES
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller YES
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller YES
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement YES
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium s upervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer －
TVTR: Voltage transformer －
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer YES
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Nodes PCS-9705
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
8.5 DNP3.0 Interface
8.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany th is device. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this device, and also specifies what data is available from this device via DNP3.0.
The device operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports at the rear side of
this device. The Ethernet ports are optional: electrical or optical.
8.5.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
8.5.3 Transport Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
8.5.4 Application Layer Functions

8.5.4.1 Time Synchronization
1) Time delay measurement
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Master 0x17 －－－
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
2) Read time of device

Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x07
Slave 0x81 0x32 0x01 0x07
3) Write time of device

Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00,0x01,0x07,0x08
Slave 0x81 －－－
8.5.4.2 Supported Writing Functions
1) Write time of device
See the Section “Communication”->“DNP3.0 Interface”->“Application Layer Functions”

->“Time Synchronization”for the details.
2) Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)

Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01
Slave 0x81 －－－
8.5.4.3 Supported Reading Functions
1) Supported qualifiers
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08
2) Supported objects and variations
 Object 1, Binary inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02
The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.
 Object 2, SOE
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02 0x03
If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master
qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06”or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.
 Object 30, Analog inputs
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04
The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the relay measurement values are
transported.
 Object 40, Analog outputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02
The protection settings are transported in this object.
 Object 50, Time Synchronization
See the Section “Communication”->“DNP3.0 Interface”->“Application Layer Functions”

->“Time Synchronization”for the details.
3) Class 0 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60”for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30”and “Object 40”(see
“Supported objects and variations” in the Section “Communication”->“DNP3.0 Interface”
->“Application Layer Functions”->“Supported Reading Functions”for the details.).
4) Class 1 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60”for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and
variations” in the Section “Communication”->“DNP3.0 Interface” ->“Application Layer
Functions”->“Supported Reading Functions”).
5) Multiple object request
The master adopts the “Object 60”for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,
“0x02”, “0x03”and “0x04”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30”and “Object
40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in the Section “Communication”->“DNP3.0
Interface”->“Application Layer Functions”->“Supported Reading Functions”).
8.5.4.4 Remote Control Functions
The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this device. The function code 0x03 is for the
remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.
The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point
control object can be supported to this device.
Master Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

Slave Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
The “Object 12”is for the remote control functions.
Master Variation 0x01 0x01: closing

Control Code
Slave Variation 0x01 0x10: tripping
Date: 2011-08-05
8 Communication
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
9 Installation
9.1 General
The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
9.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER: Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations. Working in a high
voltage environment requires serious approach to avoid human injuries and damage to
equipment.
DANGER: Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and
currents are present.
DANGER: Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a device
during normal operation. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal.
Operation may be disrupted and device and measuring circuitry may be damaged.
DANGER: Always connect the device to ground, regardless of the operating conditions.
This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing, demonstrations and off-site
configuration. Operating the device without proper grounding may damage both terminal
and measuring circuitry, and may cause injuries in case of an accident.
DANGER: Never open the front or back cover from a powered equipment or from a
device connected to powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.
WARNING: The modules of this equipment may only be inserted in the designated slots.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
WARNING: Only insert or withdraw the other boards while the power supply is switched
off.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
9.3 Checking the Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The ambient temperature and humidity required
for storage please refer to 2.
9.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).
9.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human-machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
1) The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2) Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3) Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normall y mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
WARNING: Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this device.
9.6 Mechanical Installation

This device is made of a single layer 4U height with some connectors on its rear panel. The
following two figures show the dimensions and cut-out size in the cubicle of this device for
reference in mounting.
4 .0 0
20
6.80
465.00
482.60
Figure 9.6-1 Dimensions of the PCS-9705 and the cut-out in the cubicle (unit: mm)
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
Note! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this device.
All the modules must be plugged into the proper slots of this device respectively. The safety
instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, see Section “9.2 Safety Instructions”.
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
9.7 Electrial Installation and Wiring

9.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
Note! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
9.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non -corroding.
Note! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of
it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 9.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
Note! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding
strip (braided copper).
Figure 9.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
9.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is “GND”. All
the ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. So, the ground terminal on the
rear panel (see in the following figure) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
Figure 9.7-2 Ground terminal of this device
9.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round
copper conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Data of braided copper strip: threaded M4, 2.5mm 2.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 9.7-3 Ground strip and termination
9.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

9.7.5.1 CT Circuits and Other Terminal Blocks
CT Circuits:
Heavy-duty terminal block, M4 threaded terminal ends for wire cross sections from 2.5 to 4.0 mm.
Input/Outputs, Voltage-measuring inputs or power supply modules:
Welding terminals for wire cross sections should br from 1.5 to 2.5 mm2. Those devices are
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks
using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per terminal.
To meet the insulation requirements of the terminal block, for the sake of safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.
The wire used for all connections to the welding terminal blocks and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the EIA(RS)485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary power circuit wiring should be protected by using a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits
must never be open.
9.7.5.2 Ethernet port
Optical Fiber (OF) Port:
Optical Fiber communication is an option, and should be ordered as such along with the required
mechanical modules. The equipment can have an optional 100 Mbps Ethernet port. It is
recommended that OF port should use permanent connection in substation environment. 100
Mbit OF port adopts SC connector and it is compatible with 850nm multi-mode optical fiber cable.
Specific care should be taken with the bend radius of the fibers, and the use of optical shunts is
not recommended as these can degrade the transmission path over time.
Non-observance of the following measure can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
RJ-45 Port:
It can be connected to 100Base-TX Ethernet switch with shield Ethernet Cable. Ethernet network
with RJ-45 connections has to stay inside a cubicle. The RJ-45 connector when seen face on, flat
side on bottom, side tab on top, then pin 1 is on the left and pin 8 on the right.
9.7.5.3 IRIG-B connection (if applicable)
Since IRIG-B using RS485 serial communication interface, a termination 120 ohm resistor has to
be connected at each extremity of the busbar.
Figure 9.7-4 Example of IRIG-B Connections
Date: 2011-08-05
9 Installation
There must be no more than two wires connected to each terminal, this ensures that a “Daisy
Chain”or “straight line”configuration is use.
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
10 Commissioning
10.1 General
This device is set in normal working mode when it is sent to the users, it can operate normally
when energized. If any question is found, please contact the vendors.
Note! Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’
s
rating label.
10.2 Safety Instructions
WARNING: Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING: Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the technical data (2) must not be exceeded at all, not even during
testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER: Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
WARNING: Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.)
10.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0-250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
Note! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
10.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. The Chapter “Human Machine
Interface”contains a detailed description of the menu structure of this device.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. LED indicators
and alarms can be reset. Configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records
cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes
can be made.
10.5 Product Checks

After this device has been installed and connected as described in the Chapter “Installation”, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked:
 Is the device connected to the ground at the specified location?
 Does the external (and measured) power supply voltage of the station agree with the nominal
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
auxiliary voltage of the device?
 Are the current and voltage transformer (if used) connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
 Are the built-in jumpers correctly configured?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After the voltage has been applied, this device starts up. The LED indicator labeled “HEALTHY”
will light up. After approximately 20s, this device is ready for operation.
After settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out before any
interlockings or isolation is cancelled:
 Is the software version compatible with the hardware?
 Are all boards correctly assigned within this device?
 Is communication correctly configured and recognized?
 Are the binary outputs functions fully operational?
The following sections describe the checks to be performed to answer these questions and
ensure than this device is fully operation in its application.
10.5.1 Check Version

In the commissioning process, this panel is the first to check. The version of this device tells if the
device is the ordered one, and indirectly gives the hardware version. Refer to 5.3.10 for software
version.
10.5.2 Checking the Analog input

10.5.2.1 AC Voltage Input Test
This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptance tolerance.
The measurement accuracy of this device is ±2%. However, an additional allowance must be
made since the accuracy of the test equipment has to be considered.
10.5.2.2 AC Current Input Test
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptance tolerance.
The measurement accuracy of this device is ±2%. However, an additional allowance must be
made since the accuracy of the test equipment has to be considered.
10.5.2.3 Transducer Input Check (if applicable)
This test verifies that the accuracy of transducer input (if applicable) measurement is within the
acceptance tolerance. The measurement accuracy of this device is ±1% of full scan. However, an
additional allowance must be made since the accuracy of the test equipment has to be
considered.
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
10.5.3 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs

The LCD of this device gives access to input status for BI modules.
10.5.4 Checking the Output Relays

Locally or remotely control the binary output relays to output the binary output contact, testing
whether binary output functions are fully operational.
10.5.5 Testing the Communication with SCADA

Test that whether this device correctly communicates with the SCADA on Ethernet protocol. If it is
only need to test the communication port, a direct connection (without Ethernet Switch) between
this device and PC is done by a crossed wire. Use “ping” command to check this device
communication function.
10.5.6 Checking the Synchronism CB Closing

Check whether the synchronism-check function works properly.
10.5.7 Interlocking Function Check (if used)

Check whether the interlocking function works properly to prevent mishandling and blocking
corresponding binary output.
10.5.8 Checking the Adjustment of Transformer Tap Position

Check if the transformer tap position is correctly displayed and can be effectively regulated.
10.5.9 Checking Clock

After setting correct clock and date onto this device, switching off the auxiliary power at least five
minutes, start up this device again and check whether the clock and date is still correctly running.
10.5.10 Clock Synchronization Checking

Check the precision of clock synchronization.
10.5.11 Power-fail Checking
After parameter setting and clock setting, switch off the auxiliary power of this device and start up
it again. Here, the clock should run correctly; no reports and records should be lost; no SOE
should be missent to SCADA and none of the binary output contact is closed by mistaken.
10.5.12 Switching from Local to Remote Control

This device can be controlled locally using the keys on the device front panel or remotely through
the communication interface (SCADA or control center).
The control point— Local or Remote— is selected by means of special purpose binary signal input
[BI_Rmt/Loc]. Please refer to the Section “Operation Theory”->“Binary Input” for detailed
description.
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
10.5.12.1 Local Control
The switch apparatus to be controlled is selected and executed by pressing the keys on the
device front panel.
10.5.12.2 Remote Control
The switchgear units can be controlled via the communication interface (SCADA or Control
Center).
10.5.13 Final
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from this device in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the
relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that this device has been restored to service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, and alarms have been cleared and LEDs has been
reset before leaving this device.
Date: 2011-08-05
10 Commissioning
Date: 2011-08-05
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
11.1 Maintenance Schedule

It is recommended than the NR products should receive periodic monitoring after their installation.
Deterioration may occur over time. Because of the electrical and disturbed environment, it is
recommended to confirm at regular intervals that this device is operating correctly. This device is
self-supervising and therefore requires very little maintenance. Most problems will lead to an
alarm so fast and appropriate action can be done. However, some periodic tests should be done
to ensure this device is operating correctly and that the external wiring is in good condition.
Maintenance period will depend on many factors, such as:
 The operating environment
 The accessibility of the site
 The amount of available manpower
 The importance of the installation in the power system
 The consequences of failure
11.2 Appearance and Wiring Check

11.2.1 Appearance Test
 The case of this device should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be
sealed well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be
firmly fixed in the case. The terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front
panel with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.
 It is only allowed to plug or withdraw the board when the supply is reliably switched off. Never
allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AI(AC) module. Never try to insert or withdraw this
device board when it is unnecessary.
 Check weld spots on PCB to see whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All
dual inline components must be well plugged.
11.2.2 Wiring Test
The terminals connected to external apparatus must match the design paper. Labels of the wiring
terminals and nameplates in the panel must be correct and clear.
11.2.3 Jumper Check
Check whether all built-in jumpers are correctly configured.
11.3 Input/Output Check
Date: 2011-08-05
11 Maintenance
11.3.1 Alarms
The LED indicator labeled ALARM should first be checked to confirm if any alarm conditions
happen. If so, try to find the cause, eliminate it and clear the alarms to extinguish the LED by
resetting this device.
11.3.2 Binary Inputs

Test the correctness of binary input and its refreshing rate.
11.3.3 Binary Output

Test the correctness of binary output function.
11.3.4 Analog Inputs

Test the precision of AC measurement inputs and transducer inputs and their transfer time.
11.3.5 Function Check

Please refer to the Section “Commissioning”->“Product Checks”.
11.4 Method of Repair

If this device should develop fault during the time it is in service, depending on the nature of the
fault, a normal open contact will close to issue an alarm signal via terminal 1-2 in PWR board. Due
to the extensive use of surface-mounted components (SMC), faulty boards should be replaced, as
it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits with SMC technology. Thus, either the
complete device or just the faulty board can be replaced.
Replacing boards can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry on site conditions and higher
skill from the person performing the repair. If an unauthorized service centre performs the repair,
the warranty will be invalidated.
11.4.1 Replacing the Complete Device

The case and rear terminal blocks have designed to facilitate removal of the complete device.
Before working at the rear of this device, isolate all the voltages and currents connected to this
device.
11.4.1.1 Dismounting the Complete Device
Before any disconnection, check the labels correctly define the connectors and match with the
wishing description you have. Otherwise, note the wiring in order to prepare the new device
installation.
 Disconnect the power supply connector
 Disconnect the input/output connectors
 Disconnect the Ethernet RJ-45, optical fiber and IRIG-B/PPS links connected to the CPU
boards
 Disconnect the earth connection.
Date: 2011-08-05
11 Maintenance
Note! The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of
the screws being left in the terminal block or lost. Without exerting excessive force or
damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal
connectors. Remove the screw used to fasten this device to the panel, rack, etc. With
the larger diameter across heads, these screws are accessible when the access covers
are fitted and open.
Note! Withdraw this device from the panel or rack carefully and take care of its weight
because there are some heavy parts due to the internal CT/VT transformers.
11.4.1.2 Installation of New Device
To reinstall the repaired or new device, follow the above procedures in reverse. Ensure that each
terminal block is rel ocated in the correct position and the case correctly earthed, IRIG-B/PPS,
Ethernet or optical fiber connections are put back in place.
Once reinstallation is complete, this device should be commissioned again using the instruction in
10.
11.4.2 Replacing a Board
Primarily, the auxiliary power supply must be switched off. It is also strongly recommended that
the voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated. After removing the
corresponding connector, screw off the two fixation screws on a desired board. By applying
outward pressure to the two fixation screws of the board, it can be pulled out from its slot. See in
the following figure.
Figure 11.4-1 Example of Pu lling out a Board
Refit the new board and screw the two fixation screws.
Date: 2011-08-05
11 Maintenance
Note! From here on, the board pulled out is exposed and not protected against
electrostatic discharges, dust ingress, etc. Therefore, ESD precautions and clean
working conditions should be maintained at all times.
Note! Once this device has been reassembled after repair, it must be commissioned
again.
Note! All the parameter settings required for the application will need to be re-entered
after the replacement of the CPU board.
Note! Do not forget to set the jumpers on the new board in the same position as the
replaced one.
11.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all AC and DC supplies, current transformer and
voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst
cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent
chemicals.
11.6 Storage
The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C
is recommended for long-term storage.
Date: 2011-08-05
12 Decommissioning and Disposal
12.1 Decomissioning
12.1.1 Switching Off
To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
12.1.2 Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER: Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR
module of this device, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power
supply is switched off.
DANGER: Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input
module with the primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary
CTs and VT s is switched off.
12.1.3 Dismantling
The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may also
be removed.
DANGER: When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety
distance to live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled

personnel.
12.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
Note! Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.
Date: 2011-08-05
Date: 2011-08-05
13 Manual Version History
13 Manual Version History

In the current version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have
been modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
9705A:
1.00 2009-11-13 Form the original manual.
2.10
9705A:
1.00 1.01 2010-07-20 Update Chapter 1~6.
2.20
9705A:
Update Chapter 1~8.
2.20
1.01 1.02 2011-03-04 Update the contents about PCS-970 5A.
9705B:
Add the contents about PCS-9705 B.
3.00
9705A:
3.00
Update Chapter 1~8.
9705B:
1.02 1.03 2011-08-05 Update the contents about PCS-970 5A.
3.00
Add the contents about PCS-9705 C.
9705C:
3.00
Date: 2011-08-05

PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.03 (En CKZZ5305.0086.0004)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PCS-9705 X Instruction Manual en Domestic General X R1.03 (En CKZZ5305.0086.0004)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PCS-9705 Series

Bay Control Units

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual I

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definiti ons are used:

II PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Version: 1.03 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

P/N: EN_CKZZ5305.0086.0004 Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Copyright © NR 20 11. All rights reserved Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual III

IV PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual

Table of Contents ................................................................................. V

1.1 Application .......................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Functions ............................................................................................................ 1

2 Technical Data .................................................................................... 5

2.1 Electrical Specifications .................................................................................... 5

2.1.2 AC Voltage Input...................................................................................................................... 5

2.1.3 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................... 5

2.1.4 Transducer Input ..................................................................................................................... 6

2.1.5 Analog Output .......................................................................................................................... 6

2.1.6 Binary Input ............................................................................................................................. 6

2.1.7 Binary Output .......................................................................................................................... 6

2.2 Mechanical Specifications................................................................................. 6

2.4.2 Optical Fiber Port .................................................................................................................... 7

2.4.3 Clock Synchronization Port..................................................................................................... 8

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................... 8

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 8

2.5.3 Electrical Tests......................................................................................................................... 8

PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual V

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ................................................................................................. 9

2.6.2 Control Performance ............................................................................................................. 10

2.6.3 Clock Performance ................................................................................................................ 10

2.6.4 Binary Input Signal ................................................................................................................ 10

2.6.5 Information Refreshing Rate ................................................................................................. 10

3 Operation Theory ............................................................................. 13

3.1 Operating Mode Management ......................................................................... 13

3.3 Digital Sampling Input...................................................................................... 13

3.5 Receiving and Sending GOOSE Variables ..................................................... 16

3.8 Interlocking ....................................................................................................... 16

3.10 Clock Management ......................................................................................... 18

3.13 Regulation ....................................................................................................... 19

4.2 Alarm Signals for PCS-9705A .......................................................................... 21

VI PCS-9705 Series Bay Control Units Instruction Manual

5.3 AI(ECVT) (NR4201B) on Slot B02 (Optional)................................................... 49

5.6 BI Module (NR4501 or NR4504) on Slot B04~B09 .......................................... 56

5.8 AO Module (NR4411) on Slot B10(Optional) ................................................... 83

5.11 BO Module (NR4521) on Slot B14~B19 (Optional) ....................................... 92

5.13 Rear Panel Definition.................................................................................... 104

6.3 Comm_Settingsr for PCS-9705A/B/C .............................................................117

6.5 GOOSE_Links for PCS-9705A/B/C ................................................................ 130

6.8 AR_Settings for PCS-9705A........................................................................... 139

6.10 Syn_Settings1 and Syn_Settings2 for PCS-9705C .................................... 145

6.13 TP_Settings for PCS-9705A ......................................................................... 149

6.15 Interlock_Settings for PCS-9705A/B/C........................................................ 153